+

WO2009006580A1 - Optionally condensed dihydropyridine, dihydropyrimidine and dihydropyrane derivatives acting as late sodium channel blockers - Google Patents

Optionally condensed dihydropyridine, dihydropyrimidine and dihydropyrane derivatives acting as late sodium channel blockers Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2009006580A1
WO2009006580A1 PCT/US2008/069173 US2008069173W WO2009006580A1 WO 2009006580 A1 WO2009006580 A1 WO 2009006580A1 US 2008069173 W US2008069173 W US 2008069173W WO 2009006580 A1 WO2009006580 A1 WO 2009006580A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
optionally substituted
methyl
compound
carboxylate
alkyl
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2008/069173
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Matthew Abelman
Robert Jiang
Jeff Zablocki
Original Assignee
Cv Therapeutics, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Cv Therapeutics, Inc. filed Critical Cv Therapeutics, Inc.
Publication of WO2009006580A1 publication Critical patent/WO2009006580A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D409/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D409/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D409/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D211/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings
    • C07D211/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D211/80—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having two double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D211/84—Heterocyclic compounds containing hydrogenated pyridine rings, not condensed with other rings with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having two double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms, with at the most one bond to halogen directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D211/90—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D215/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems
    • C07D215/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen atoms or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D215/16—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen atoms or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D215/48—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen
    • C07D215/54—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen attached in position 3
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D311/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings
    • C07D311/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings ortho- or peri-condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D311/74—Benzo[b]pyrans, hydrogenated in the carbocyclic ring
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D311/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings
    • C07D311/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings ortho- or peri-condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D311/94—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings ortho- or peri-condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems condensed with rings other than six-membered or with ring systems containing such rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D405/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D407/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D405/00
    • C07D407/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D405/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D407/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D405/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D471/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D487/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D491/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00
    • C07D491/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00 in which the condensed system contains three hetero rings
    • C07D491/14—Ortho-condensed systems
    • C07D491/147—Ortho-condensed systems the condensed system containing one ring with oxygen as ring hetero atom and two rings with nitrogen as ring hetero atom

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to novel heterocyclic compounds and to their use in the treatment of various disease states, including cardiovascular diseases and diabetes.
  • the invention also relates to methods for their preparation, and to pharmaceutical compositions containing such compounds.
  • the present invention provides novel substituted heterocyclic compounds that function as late sodium channel blockers.
  • the invention relates to compounds of Formula (I):
  • Ql is carbon or nitrogen
  • Q2 is oxygen or Rl -N ⁇ , where Rl is hydrogen or optionally substituted lower alkyl; the double dotted line indicated by the arrow is a single bond or a double bond; R2 is hydrogen, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or -NR21R22, where R21 and R22 are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl;
  • R3 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, cyano, -C(O)-R31, or -C(O)-O-R31, where R31 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl; or R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is attached form a 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or a saturated or unsaturated carbocyclic moiety, all of which are optionally substituted, for example by halo, optionally substitute
  • R4 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl, provided that any substituent of R4 may itself be optionally substituted, for example by halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl;
  • R5 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -O-R51, or -NR52R53, where R51 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, where R52 and R53 are each independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or R52 and R53 taken together with the nitrogen to which they are both directly attached form 5 or 6 membered heterocycl
  • R6 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl, -NR61R62, where R61 and R62 are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl; or R5 and R6 taken together with the carbons to which R5 and R6 are directly attached and the carbon directly attached to both of the carbons to which R5 and R6 are directly attached form a 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or a saturated or unsaturated carbocyclic moiety, all of which are optionally substituted by halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl
  • the invention provides pharmaceutical formulations comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula (I) and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
  • Some embodiments provide a method of using the compounds of Formula (I) in the treatment of a disease or condition in a mammal that is amenable to treatment by a late sodium channel blocker.
  • cardiovascular diseases such as atrial and ventricular arrhythmias, heart failure (including congestive heart failure, diastolic heart failure, systolic heart failure, acute heart failure), Prinzmetal's (variant) angina, stable and unstable angina, exercise induced angina, congestive heart disease, ischemia, recurrent ischemia, reperfusion injury, myocardial infarction, acute coronary syndrome, peripheral arterial disease, and intermittent claudication.
  • diseases may also include diabetes, and conditions related to diabetes, e.g. diabetic peripheral neuropathy.
  • diseases may also include conditions affecting the neuromuscular system resulting in pain, seizures, or paralysis.
  • Figure 1 shows a typical response due to activation of Na v 1.5 sodium channel in a sodium current assay.
  • Figure 2 is a plot of sodium current measured with and without Tefluthrin.
  • Figure 3 illustrates hERG channel activation upon application of the indicated potential.
  • Figure 4 shows inhibition of L-type calcium channel activity.
  • Figure 5 shows typical L-type calcium channel current traces in response to a depolarizing stimulus before and after application of a calcium channel blocker (10 nM and 10 ⁇ M nifedipine).
  • Figure 6 shows peak INa plotted as a function of experiment time.
  • alkyl refers to a monoradical branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon chain having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, t-butyl, n-hexyl, n-decyl, tetradecyl, and the like.
  • substituted alkyl refers to:
  • alkyl group as defined above, having 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents, (typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents) selected from the group consisting of alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxy, keto, thiocarbonyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, arylthio, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, thiol, alkylthio, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonylamino, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-aryl,-SO-heteroaryl, -SO 2 - alkyl
  • substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF 3 , amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -S(O) n R, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2; or
  • alkyl group as defined above that is interrupted by 1-10 atoms (e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 atoms) independently chosen from oxygen, sulfur and NRa-, where Ra is chosen from hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl. All substituents may be optionally further substituted by alkyl, alkoxy, halogen, CF 3 , amino, substituted amino, cyano, or -S(O) n R, in which R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2; or
  • lower alkyl refers to a monoradical branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon chain having 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, t- butyl, n-hexyl, and the like.
  • substituted lower alkyl refers to lower alkyl as defined above having 1 to 5 substituents (typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents), as defined for substituted alkyl, or a lower alkyl group as defined above that is interrupted by 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 atoms as defined for substituted alkyl, or a lower alkyl group as defined above that has both 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents as defined above and is also interrupted by 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 atoms as defined above.
  • substituents typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents
  • alkylene refers to a diradical of a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon chain, typically having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms (e.g. 1-10 carbon atoms, or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 carbon atoms). This term is exemplified by groups such as methylene (-CH 2 -), ethylene (-CH 2 CH 2 -), the propylene isomers (e.g., - CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 - and-CH(CH 3 )CH 2 -), and the like.
  • lower alkylene refers to a diradical of a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon chain, typically having 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 carbon atoms.
  • substituted alkylene refers to:
  • substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF 3 , amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -S(O) n R, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2; or (2) an alkylene group as defined above that is interrupted by 1-10 groups (e.g.
  • Ra is chosen from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl; or
  • alkylene group as defined above that has both 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents as defined above and is also interrupted by 1-10 groups as defined above.
  • substituted alkylenes are chloromethylene (-CH(Cl)-), aminoethylene (-CH(NH 2 )CH 2 -), methylaminoethylene (-CH(NHMe)CH 2 -), 2- carboxypropylene isomers(-CH 2 CH(CO 2 H)CH 2 -), ethoxyethyl (-CH 2 CH 2 O- CH 2 CH 2 -), ethylmethylaminoethyl (-CH 2 CH 2 -N(CH 3 )-CH 2 CH 2 -), l-ethoxy-2- (2-ethoxy-ethoxy)ethane (-CH 2 CH 2 O-CH 2 CH 2 -OCH 2 CH 2 -OCH 2 CH 2 -), and the like.
  • aralkyl refers to an aryl group covalently linked to an alkylene group, where aryl and alkylene are defined herein.
  • Optionally substituted aralkyl refers to an optionally substituted aryl group covalently linked to an optionally substituted alkylene group.
  • Such aralkyl groups are exemplified by benzyl, phenylethyl, 3-(4-methoxyphenyl)propyl, and the like.
  • alkoxy refers to the group R-O-, where R is optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl, or R is a group -Y-Z, in which Y is optionally substituted alkylene and Z is optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl; or optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, where alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl and cycloalkenyl are as defined herein.
  • Typical alkoxy groups are alkyl-O- and include, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, iso-propoxy, n- butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexyloxy, 1 ,2-dimethylbutoxy, and the like.
  • lower alkoxy refers to the group R-O- in which R is optionally substituted lower alkyl as defined above. This term is exemplified by groups such as methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, iso-propoxy, n-butoxy, iso-butoxy, t-butoxy, n-hexyloxy, and the like.
  • alkylthio refers to the group R-S-, where R is as defined for alkoxy.
  • alkenyl refers to a monoradical of a branched or unbranched unsaturated hydrocarbon group typically having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms (more typically from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, e.g. 2 to 6 carbon atoms) and having from 1 to 6 carbon-carbon double bonds, e.g. 1, 2, or 3 carbon-carbon double bonds.
  • lower alkenyl refers to alkenyl as defined above having from 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • substituted alkenyl refers to an alkenyl group as defined above having 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents (typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents), selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxy, keto, thiocarbonyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, arylthio, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, thiol, alkylthio, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonylamino, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO
  • alkynyl refers to a monoradical of an unsaturated hydrocarbon, typically having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms (more typically from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, e.g. 2 to 6 carbon atoms) and having from 1 to 6 carbon-carbon triple bonds e.g.
  • alkynyl groups include ethynyl (-C ⁇ CH), propargyl (or propynyl, -C ⁇ CCH3), and the like. In the event that alkynyl is attached to nitrogen, the triple bond cannot be alpha to the nitrogen.
  • substituted alkynyl refers to an alkynyl group as defined above having 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents (typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents), selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxy, keto, thiocarbonyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, arylthio, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, thiol, alkylthio, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonylamino, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl,
  • substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF 3 , amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -S(O) n R, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2.
  • aminocarbonyl refers to the group -C(O)NRR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or where both R groups are joined to form a heterocyclic group (e.g., morpholino).
  • substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF 3 , amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -S(O) n R, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2.
  • esters or “carboxyester” refers to the group -C(O)OR, where R is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl, which may be optionally further substituted by alkyl, alkoxy, halogen, CF 3 , amino, substituted amino, cyano, or - S(O) n Ra, in which Ra is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2.
  • acylamino refers to the group -NRC(O)R where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl.
  • acyloxy refers to the groups -OC(O)-alkyl, -OC(O)-cycloalkyl, - OC(O)-aryl, -OC(O)-heteroaryl, and -OC(O)-heterocyclyl.
  • substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1 , 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF 3 , amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -S(O) n R, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2.
  • aryl refers to an aromatic carbocyclic group of 6 to 20 carbon atoms having a single ring (e.g., phenyl) or multiple rings (e.g., biphenyl), or multiple condensed (fused) rings (e.g., naphthyl, fluorenyl, and anthryl).
  • Typical aryls include phenyl, fluorenyl, naphthyl, anthryl, and the like.
  • such aryl groups can optionally be substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents (typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents), selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxy, keto, thiocarbonyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, arylthio, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, thiol, alkylthio, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonylamino, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl,
  • substituents typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents
  • substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF 3 , amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -S(O) n R, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2.
  • aryloxy refers to the group aryl-O- wherein the aryl group is as defined above, and includes optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined above.
  • arylthio refers to the group R-S-, where R is as defined for aryl.
  • amino refers to the group -NH 2 .
  • substituted amino refers to the group -NRR where each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl provided that both R groups are not hydrogen, or a group - Y-Z, in which Y is optionally substituted alkylene and Z is alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, or alkynyl.
  • substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF 3 , amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -S(O) n R, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2.
  • Carboxyalkyl refers to the groups -C(O)O-alkyl, -C(O)O- cycloalkyl, where alkyl and cycloalkyl are as defined herein, and may be optionally further substituted by alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, halogen, CF 3 , amino, substituted amino, cyano, or -S(O) n R, in which R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2.
  • cycloalkyl refers to cyclic alkyl groups of from 3 to 20 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings.
  • Such cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclooctyl, and the like, or multiple ring structures such as adamantanyl, and bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, or cyclic alkyl groups to which is fused an aryl group, for example indan, and the like.
  • substituted cycloalkyl refers to cycloalkyl groups having 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents (typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents), selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxy, keto, thiocarbonyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, arylthio, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, thiol, alkylthio, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonylamino, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO- alkyl, -SO
  • substituted cycloalkyl also includes cycloalkyl groups wherein one or more of the annular carbon atoms of the cycloalkyl group is a carbonyl group (i.e. an oxygen atom is oxo to the ring). Unless otherwise constrained by the definition, all substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF 3 , amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -S(O) n R, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2.
  • halogen refers to fluoro, bromo, chloro, and iodo.
  • acyl denotes a group -C(O)R, in which R is hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, and optionally substituted heteroaryl.
  • heteroaryl refers to a group comprising 1 to 15 carbon atoms and 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur within at least one ring.
  • heteroaryl is generic to the terms “aromatic heteroaryl” and “partially saturated heteroaryl”.
  • aromatic heteroaryl refers to a heteroaryl in which at least one ring is aromatic. Examples of aromatic heteroaryls include pyrrole, thiophene, pyridine, quinoline, pteridine.
  • partially saturated heteroaryl refers to a heteroaryl having a structure equivalent to an underlying aromatic heteroaryl which has had one or more double bonds in an aromatic ring of the underlying aromatic heteroaryl saturated. Examples of partially saturated heteroaryls include dihydropyrrole, dihydropyridine, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene.
  • heteroaryl groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5 substituents (typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents) selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxy, keto, thiocarbonyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl (an alkyl ester), arylthio, heteroaryl, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, thiol, alkylthio, aryl, aryloxy, aralkyl, heteroaryl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonylamino, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamin
  • substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF 3 , amino, substituted amino, cyano, and - S(O) n R, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2.
  • Such heteroaryl groups can have a single ring (e.g., pyridyl or furyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., indolizinyl, benzothiazole, or benzothienyl).
  • nitrogen heterocyclyls and heteroaryls include, but are not limited to, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthylpyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, phenanthroline, isothiazole, phenazine, isoxazole, phenoxazine, phenothiazine, imidazolidine, imidazoline, and the like as well as N-alkoxy-nitrogen containing heteroaryl compounds.
  • heteroaryloxy refers to the group heteroaryl-O-.
  • heterocyclyl refers to a monoradical saturated group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings, having from 1 to 40 carbon atoms and from 1 to 10 hetero atoms, preferably 1 to 4 heteroatoms, selected from nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, and/or oxygen within the ring.
  • heterocyclic groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5 substituents (typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents), selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxy, keto, thiocarbonyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, arylthio, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, thiol, alkylthio, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonylamino, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO- alkyl, -SO-
  • substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF 3 , amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -
  • heterocyclic groups can have a single ring or multiple condensed rings.
  • Preferred heterocyclics include tetrahydrofuranyl, morpholino, piperidinyl, and the like.
  • thiol refers to the group -SH.
  • substituted alkylthio refers to the group -S -substituted alkyl.
  • heteroarylthiol refers to the group -S-heteroaryl wherein the heteroaryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted heteroaryl groups as also defined above.
  • sulfoxide refers to a group -S(O)R, in which R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl.
  • substituted sulfoxide refers to a group -S(O)R, in which R is substituted alkyl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl, as defined herein.
  • sulfone refers to a group -S(O) 2 R, in which R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl.
  • substituted sulfone refers to a group -S(O) 2 R, in which R is substituted alkyl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl, as defined herein.
  • keto refers to a group -C(O)-.
  • thiocarbonyl refers to a group -C(S)-.
  • carboxy refers to a group -C(O)-OH.
  • a "substituted" group includes embodiments in which a monoradical substituent is bound to a single atom of the substituted group (e.g. forming a branch), and also includes embodiments in which the substituent may be a diradical bridging group bound to two adjacent atoms of the substituted group, thereby forming a fused ring on the substituted group.
  • a compound of a given Formula (e.g. the "compound of Formula (I)") is intended to encompass the compounds of the invention as disclosed, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, pharmaceutically acceptable esters, hydrates, polymorphs, and prodrugs of such compounds. Additionally, the compounds of the invention may possess one or more asymmetric centers, and can be produced as a racemic mixture or as individual enantiomers or diastereoisomers. The number of stereoisomers present in any given compound of a given Formula depends upon the number of asymmetric centers present (there are 2n stereoisomers possible where n is the number of asymmetric centers).
  • the individual stereoisomers may be obtained by resolving a racemic or non-racemic mixture of an intermediate at some appropriate stage of the synthesis, or by resolution of the compound by conventional means.
  • the individual stereoisomers (including individual enantiomers and diastereoisomers) as well as racemic and non-racemic mixtures of stereoisomers are encompassed within the scope of the present invention, all of which are intended to be depicted by the structures of this specification unless otherwise specifically indicated.
  • Stepoisomers are isomers that differ only in the way the atoms are arranged in space.
  • Enantiomers are a pair of stereoisomers that are non-superimposable mirror images of each other. A 1:1 mixture of a pair of enantiomers is a “racemic" mixture.
  • ( ⁇ ) is used to designate a racemic mixture where appropriate.
  • Diastereoisomers are stereoisomers that have at least two asymmetric atoms, but which are not mirror-images of each other.
  • therapeutically effective amount refers to an amount that is sufficient to effect treatment, as defined below, when administered to a mammal in need of such treatment.
  • the therapeutically effective amount will vary depending upon the subject and disease condition being treated, the weight and age of the subject, the severity of the disease condition, the manner of administration and the like, which can readily be determined by one of ordinary skill in the art.
  • treatment means any treatment of a disease in a mammal, including:
  • the compounds of this invention are capable of forming acid and/or base salts by virtue of the presence of amino and/or carboxyl groups or groups similar thereto.
  • salts of a given compound refers to salts that retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the given compound, and which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts can be prepared from inorganic and organic bases. Salts derived from inorganic bases include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, lithium, ammonium, calcium and magnesium salts.
  • Salts derived from organic bases include, but are not limited to, salts of primary, secondary and tertiary amines, such as alkyl amines, dialkyl amines, trialkyl amines, substituted alkyl amines, di(substituted alkyl) amines, tri(substituted alkyl) amines, alkenyl amines, dialkenyl amines, trialkenyl amines, substituted alkenyl amines, di(substituted alkenyl) amines, tri(substituted alkenyl) amines, cycloalkyl amines, di(cycloalkyl) amines, tri(cycloalkyl) amines, substituted cycloalkyl amines, disubstituted cycloalkyl amine, trisubstituted cycloalkyl amines, cycloalkenyl amines, di(cycloalkeny
  • Suitable amines include, by way of example only, isopropylamine, trimethyl amine, diethyl amine, tri(iso-propyl) amine, tri(n-propyl) amine, ethanolamine, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, tromethamine, lysine, arginine, histidine, caffeine, procaine, hydrabamine, choline, betaine, ethylenediamine, glucosamine, N-alkylglucamines, theobromine, purines, piperazine, piperidine, morpholine, N-ethylpiperidine, and the like.
  • Salts derived from inorganic acids include hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
  • Salts derived from organic acids include acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, oxalic acid, malic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, p-toluene-sulfonic acid, salicylic acid, and the like.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carrier includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents and the like.
  • the use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active ingredient, its use in the therapeutic compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active ingredients can also be incorporated into the compositions.
  • Chronic diseases or “cardiovascular diseases” refer to diseases of the cardiovasculature arising from any one or more than one of, for example, heart failure (including congestive heart failure, diastolic heart failure and systolic heart failure), acute heart failure, ischemia, recurrent ischemia, myocardial infarction, arrhythmias, angina (including exercise-induced angina, variant angina, stable angina, unstable angina), acute coronary syndrome, diabetes, and intermittent claudication.
  • heart failure including congestive heart failure, diastolic heart failure and systolic heart failure
  • acute heart failure ischemia, recurrent ischemia, myocardial infarction, arrhythmias
  • angina including exercise-induced angina, variant angina, stable angina, unstable angina
  • acute coronary syndrome diabetes
  • intermittent claudication means the pain associated with peripheral artery disease.
  • Peripheral artery disease or PAD is a type of occlusive peripheral vascular disease (
  • PAD affects the arteries outside the heart and brain.
  • the most common symptom of PAD is a painful cramping in the hips, thighs, or calves when walking, climbing stairs, or exercising.
  • the pain is called intermittent claudication.
  • intermittent claudication When listing the symptom intermittent claudication, it is intended to include both PAD and PVD
  • Arrhythmia refers to any abnormal heart rate. Bradycardia refers to abnormally slow heart rate whereas tachycardia refers to an abnormally rapid heart rate.
  • the treatment of arrhythmia is intended to include the treatment of supra ventricular tachycardias such as atrial fibrillation, atrial flutter, AV nodal reentrant tachycardia, atrial tachycardia, and the ventricular tachycardias (VTs), including idiopathic ventricular tachycardia, ventricular fibrillation, pre-excitation syndrome, and Torsade de Pointes (TdP),
  • supra ventricular tachycardias such as atrial fibrillation, atrial flutter, AV nodal reentrant tachycardia, atrial tachycardia, and the ventricular tachycardias (VTs), including idiopathic ventricular tachycardia, ventricular fibrillation, pre-excitation syndrome
  • the present invention provides novel substituted heterocyclic compounds that function as late sodium channel blockers.
  • the invention relates to compounds of Formula (I):
  • Ql is carbon or nitrogen
  • Q2 is oxygen or Rl-N ⁇ , where Rl is hydrogen or optionally substituted lower alkyl; the double dotted line indicated by the arrow is a single bond or a double bond;
  • R2 is hydrogen, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or -NR21R22, where R21 and R22 are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl;
  • R3 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, cyano, -C(O)-R31, or -C(O)-O-R31, where R31 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl; or R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is attached form a 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or a saturated or unsaturated carbocyclic moiety, all of which are optionally substituted, for example by halo, optionally substitute
  • R4 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl, provided that any substituent of R4 may itself be optionally substituted, for example by halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl;
  • R5 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -O-R51, or -NR52R53, where R51 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, where R52 and R53 are each independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or R52 and R53 taken together with the nitrogen to which they are both directly attached form 5 or 6 membered heterocycl
  • R6 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl, -NR61R62, where R61 and R62 are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl; or R5 and R6 taken together with the carbons to which R5 and R6 are directly attached and the carbon directly attached to both of the carbons to which R5 and R6 are directly attached form a 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or a saturated or unsaturated carbocyclic moiety, all of which are optionally substituted by halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl
  • R2 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or -NR21R22, where R21 and R22 are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, or optionally substituted alkynyl.
  • R2 is optionally substituted lower alkyl or -NR21R22, where R21 and R22 are independently hydrogen, optionally substituted lower alkyl, or optionally substituted alkyl.
  • R2 is amino, substituted amino, methyl, ethyl, 1 -propyl, 2-propyl, or (2-aminoethoxy)methyl.
  • R3 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, cyano, -C(O)-R31, or -C(O)-O-R31, where R31 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted aralkyl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl.
  • R3 is optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, cyano, - C(O)-R31, or -C(O)-O-R31, where R31 is hydrogen, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted aralkyl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl.
  • R3 is optionally substituted lower alkyl, cyano, -C(O)-R31, or -C(O)-O-R31, where R31 is optionally substituted lower alkyl, methyl, ethyl, 1 -propyl, 2-propyl, 2-methoxyethyl, benzyl, substituted benzyl, or 3,4-dimethoxybenzyl.
  • R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is attached form a 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or an aromatic or non-aromatic carbocyclic moiety, all of which are optionally substituted by halo, cyano, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or optionally substituted heterocyclyl.
  • R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is directly attached form a tetrazole ring; such embodiments may be represented by the Formula (II):
  • Rl, R4, R5, and R6 are as described above with relation to Formula (I).
  • R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is directly attached form a pyrazole ring; some such embodiments may be represented by the Formula (III) or Formula (IV): Formula (III)
  • Rl, R4, R5, and R6 are as described above with relation to Formula (I), and R23, R24 (if present), and R25 (if present) are each independently hydrogen, cyano, halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted aralkyl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or optionally substituted heterocyclyl.
  • R23, R24, and R25 are each independently methyl, ethyl, 1- propyl, 2-propyl, cyano, optionally substituted thiophenyl, optionally substituted furanyl, or optionally substituted phenyl (e.g. methylphenyl), or R23 and R24 taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted phenyl ring, an optionally substituted carbocyclic ring, or an optionally substituted heteroaryl ring.
  • R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is directly attached form an imidazole ring; some such embodiments may be represented by the Formula (V): Formula (V)
  • Rl, R4, R5, and R6 are as described above with relation to Formula (I), and R24 and R25 are each independently hydrogen, cyano, halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted aralkyl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or optionally substituted heterocyclyl.
  • R24 and R25 are each independently methyl, ethyl, 1 -propyl, 2-propyl, cyano, optionally substituted thiophenyl, optionally substituted furanyl, or optionally substituted phenyl (e.g. methylphenyl), or R24 and R25 taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted phenyl ring, an optionally substituted carbocyclic ring, or an optionally substituted heteroaryl ring.
  • R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is directly attached form a five or six membered carbocyclic ring; some such embodiments may be represented by the Formula (VI):
  • R24" is a covalent bond connecting the two carbons to which R24" is attached or is - CR24R24'-;
  • R23, R24 (if present), and R25 are each independently hydrogen, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted aralkyl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or optionally substituted heterocyclyl; and
  • R23', R24' (if present), and R25' are each independently hydrogen or optionally substituted lower alkyl.
  • R24" is a covalent bond connecting the two carbons to which R24" is attached or is -CR24R24'-;
  • R23, R24 (if present), and R25 are each independently hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, optionally substituted phenyl, optionally substituted thiophenyl, optionally substituted furany;
  • R23', R24' (if present), and R25' are each independently hydrogen, methyl, or ethyl.
  • R4 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl.
  • R4 is aryl substituted with one or more groups selected from aryl, lower alkyl, alkyl, heteroaryl, halo, heterocyclyl, amino, and carboxyl, wherein said one or more groups are optionally substituted with alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, halo, or carboxyl.
  • R4 is optionally substituted phenyl, optionally substituted biphenyl, optionally substituted naphthalenyl, optionally substituted anthracenyl, optionally substituted thiophenyl, optionally substituted furanyl, optionally substituted benzofuranyl, optionally substituted benzothiophenyl, optionally substituted quinolinyl, optionally substituted pyrazinyl, or optionally substituted pyridinyl.
  • R5 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -O-R51, or -NR52R53, where R51 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, where R52 and R53 are each independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or R52 and R53 taken together with the nitrogen to which they are both directly attached form 5
  • R5 is -O-R51, wherein R51 is optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted benzyl, optionally substituted biphenyl, optionally substituted diphenylmethyl, methyl, ethyl, 1- propyl, 2-propyl.
  • R5 is -NR52R53, where R52 and R53 are each independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted benzyl, or R52 and R53 taken together with the nitrogen to which they are both directly attached form 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl moiety, which is optionally substituted by halo, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, aryl, or cycloalkyl (each of which may be optionally substituted).
  • R6 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl, -NR61R62, where R61 and R62 are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, or optionally substituted alkynyl.
  • R6 is methyl, trifluoromethyl, ethyl, 1 -propyl, 2-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, 3-methoxyethyl, or (2-amino)ethoxymethyl.
  • R5 and R6 taken together with the carbons to which R5 and R6 are directly attached and the carbon directly attached to both of the carbons to which R5 and R6 are directly attached form a 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or a saturated or unsaturated carbocyclic moiety, all of which are optionally substituted by halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl.
  • R5 and R6 taken together form a bridging group having the structure: -R54-R55-R56-R63-, where:
  • R54 is bound directly to the carbonyl carbon of Formula (I) and is -O-, -NR54'-, or -CR54'R54"-, where R54' and R54" are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, or optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted aryl.
  • R55 taken together with R56 is a covalent bond connecting R54 to R63, or
  • R55 is a covalent bond connecting R54 to R56 or is - CR55'R55"-, where R55' and R55" are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, or optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted aryl; and
  • R56 is -CR56'R56"- where R56' and R56" are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, or optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted aryl.
  • R63 is -CR63'R63" where R63' and R63" are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, or optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted aryl.
  • a given group is described herein as being attached to a second group and the site of attachment is not explicit, the given group may be attached at any available site of the given group to any available site of the second group.
  • a "lower alkyl-substituted phenyl" where the attachment sites are not explicit, may have any available site of the lower alkyl group attached to any available site of the phenyl group.
  • an "available site” is a site of the group at which a hydrogen of the group may be replaced with a substituent.
  • the compounds provided by the present invention are effective in the treatment of conditions known to respond to administration of late sodium channel blockers, including cardiovascular diseases such as atrial and ventricular arrhythmias, Prinzmetal's (variant) angina, stable angina, unstable angina, ischemia and reperfusion injury in cardiac, kidney, liver and the brain, exercise induced angina, congestive heart disease, and myocardial infarction.
  • cardiovascular diseases such as atrial and ventricular arrhythmias, Prinzmetal's (variant) angina, stable angina, unstable angina, ischemia and reperfusion injury in cardiac, kidney, liver and the brain
  • exercise induced angina congestive heart disease
  • myocardial infarction myocardial infarction
  • compounds provided by the present invention which function as late sodium channel blockers may be used in the treatment of diseases affecting the neuromuscular system resulting in pain, seizures, or paralysis, or in the treatment of diabetes and disease states related to diabetes, such as diabetic peripheral neuropathy.
  • Certain compounds of the invention may also possess a sufficient activity in modulating neuronal sodium channels and may have appropriate pharmacokinetic properties such that they may active with regard to the central and/or peripheral nervous system. Consequently, some compounds of the invention may also be of use in the treatment of pain of neuropathic origin.
  • the present invention is intended to encompass the compounds disclosed herein, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, pharmaceutically acceptable esters, tautomeric forms, polymorphs, and prodrugs of such compounds.
  • the present invention includes a pharmaceutically acceptable addition salt, a pharmaceutically acceptable ester, a hydrate of an addition salt, a tautomeric form, a polymorph, an enantiomer, a mixture of enantiomers, a stereoisomer or mixture of stereoisomers (pure or as a racemic or non-racemic mixture) of a compound described herein, e.g. a compound of Formulae (I), (II), (III), (IV), (V), (VI), further e.g. a compound listed in Table 1, below.
  • Pharmaceutical Compositions e.g. a compound of Formulae (I), (II), (III), (IV), (V), (VI), further e.g. a compound listed in Table 1, below.
  • compositions that contain, as the active ingredient, one or more of the compounds described, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof, and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients, carriers, including inert solid diluents and fillers, diluents, including sterile aqueous solution and various organic solvents, permeation enhancers, solubilizers and adjuvants.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may be administered alone or in combination with other therapeutic agents.
  • Such compositions are prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art (see, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mace Publishing Co., Philadelphia, PA 17th Ed. (1985); and Modern Pharmaceutics, Marcel Dekker, Inc. 3rd Ed. (G.S. Banker & CT. Rhodes, Eds.)
  • compositions may be administered in either single or multiple doses by any of the accepted modes of administration of agents having similar utilities, for example as described in those patents and patent applications incorporated by reference, including rectal, buccal, intranasal and transdermal routes, by intraarterial injection, intravenously, intraperitoneally, parenterally, intramuscularly, subcutaneously, orally, topically, as an inhalant, or via an impregnated or coated device such as a stent, for example, or an artery-inserted cylindrical polymer.
  • One mode for administration is parenteral, particularly by injection.
  • Aqueous solutions in saline are also conventionally used for injection, but less preferred in the context of the present invention.
  • Ethanol, glycerol, propylene glycol, liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like (and suitable mixtures thereof), cyclodextrin derivatives, and vegetable oils may also be employed.
  • the proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants.
  • the prevention of the action of microorganisms can be brought about by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like.
  • Sterile injectable solutions are prepared by incorporating a compound according to the present invention in the required amount in the appropriate solvent with various other ingredients as enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization.
  • dispersions are prepared by incorporating the various sterilized active ingredients into a sterile vehicle which contains the basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above.
  • a sterile vehicle which contains the basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above.
  • the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum-drying and freeze-drying techniques which yield a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile- filtered solution thereof.
  • Oral administration is another route for administration of compounds in accordance with the invention. Administration may be via capsule or enteric coated tablets, or the like.
  • the active ingredient is usually diluted by an excipient and/or enclosed within such a carrier that can be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper or other container.
  • the excipient serves as a diluent, it can be in the form of a solid, semi-solid, or liquid material (as above), which acts as a vehicle, carrier or medium for the active ingredient.
  • compositions can be in the form of tablets, pills, powders, lozenges, sachets, cachets, elixirs, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, syrups, aerosols (as a solid or in a liquid medium), ointments containing, for example, up to 10% by weight of the active compound, soft and hard gelatin capsules, sterile injectable solutions, and sterile packaged powders.
  • excipients include lactose, dextrose, sucrose, sorbitol, mannitol, starches, gum acacia, calcium phosphate, alginates, tragacanth, gelatin, calcium silicate, microcrystalline cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, cellulose, sterile water, syrup, and methyl cellulose.
  • the formulations can additionally include: lubricating agents such as talc, magnesium stearate, and mineral oil; wetting agents; emulsifying and suspending agents; preserving agents such as methyl and propylhydroxy-benzoates; sweetening agents; and flavoring agents.
  • compositions of the invention can be formulated so as to provide quick, sustained or delayed release of the active ingredient after administration to the patient by employing procedures known in the art.
  • Controlled release drug delivery systems for oral administration include osmotic pump systems and dissolutional systems containing polymer-coated reservoirs or drug-polymer matrix formulations. Examples of controlled release systems are given in U.S. Patent Nos. 3,845,770; 4,326,525; 4,902514; and 5,616,345.
  • Another formulation for use in the methods of the present invention employs transdermal delivery devices ("patches"). Such transdermal patches may be used to provide continuous or discontinuous infusion of the compounds of the present invention in controlled amounts.
  • transdermal patches for the delivery of pharmaceutical agents is well known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,023,252, 4,992,445 and 5,001,139. Such patches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of pharmaceutical agents.
  • the compositions are preferably formulated in a unit dosage form.
  • unit dosage forms refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient (e.g., a tablet, capsule, ampoule).
  • the compounds are generally administered in a pharmaceutically effective amount.
  • each dosage unit contains from 1 mg to 2 g of a compound described herein, and for parenteral administration, preferably from 0.1 to 700 mg of a compound a compound described herein. It will be understood, however, that the amount of the compound actually administered usually will be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered and its relative activity, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
  • the principal active ingredient is mixed with a pharmaceutical excipient to form a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention.
  • a pharmaceutical excipient to form a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention.
  • these preformulation compositions as homogeneous, it is meant that the active ingredient is dispersed evenly throughout the composition so that the composition may be readily subdivided into equally effective unit dosage forms such as tablets, pills and capsules.
  • the tablets or pills of the present invention may be coated or otherwise compounded to provide a dosage form affording the advantage of prolonged action, or to protect from the acid conditions of the stomach.
  • the tablet or pill can comprise an inner dosage and an outer dosage component, the latter being in the form of an envelope over the former.
  • the two components can be separated by an enteric layer that serves to resist disintegration in the stomach and permit the inner component to pass intact into the duodenum or to be delayed in release.
  • enteric layers or coatings such materials including a number of polymeric acids and mixtures of polymeric acids with such materials as shellac, cetyl alcohol, and cellulose acetate.
  • compositions for inhalation or insufflation include solutions and suspensions in pharmaceutically acceptable, aqueous or organic solvents, or mixtures thereof, and powders.
  • the liquid or solid compositions may contain suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients as described supra.
  • the compositions are administered by the oral or nasal respiratory route for local or systemic effect.
  • Compositions in preferably pharmaceutically acceptable solvents may be nebulized by use of inert gases. Nebulized solutions may be inhaled directly from the nebulizing device or the nebulizing device may be attached to a facemask tent, or intermittent positive pressure breathing machine. Solution, suspension, or powder compositions may be administered, preferably orally or nasally, from devices that deliver the formulation in an appropriate manner.
  • solvent refers to a solvent inert under the conditions of the reaction being described in conjunction therewith (including, for example, benzene, toluene, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran (“THF”), dimethylformamide (“DMF”), chloroform, methylene chloride (or dichloromethane), diethyl ether, methanol, pyridine and the like).
  • THF tetrahydrofuran
  • DMF dimethylformamide
  • chloroform chloroform
  • methylene chloride or dichloromethane
  • pyridine a solvent inert gas
  • q.s means adding a quantity sufficient to achieve a stated function, e.g., to bring a solution to the desired volume (i.e., 100%).
  • the compounds of the invention may be prepared using methods disclosed herein and routine modifications thereof which will be apparent given the disclosure herein and methods well known in the art. Conventional and well-known synthetic methods may be used in addition to the teachings herein.
  • the synthesis of typical compounds described herein, e.g. compounds having structures described by one or more of Formulae (I) - (VI), may be accomplished as described in the following examples. If available, reagents may be purchased commercially, e.g. from Sigma Aldrich or other chemical suppliers.
  • Typical embodiments of compounds in accordance with the present invention may be synthesized using the general reaction schemes described below. It will be apparent given the description herein that the general schemes may be altered by substitution of the starting materials with other materials having similar structures to result in products that are correspondingly different. Descriptions of syntheses follow to provide numerous examples of how the starting materials may vary to provide corresponding products. Given a desired product for which the substituent groups (e.g. Rl, R2, R3, R4, R5 and/or R6) are defined, the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection. Starting materials are typically obtained from commercial sources or synthesized using published methods. Note that in the following examples, general syntheses may be shown using groups denoted with subscripts (e.g.
  • Ri, R 2 , R 3 , etc. These are distinguished from the groups described herein that do not have subscripts (e.g. Rl, R2, R3 etc.).
  • the groups denoted with subscripts are used to describe the general form of the reaction.
  • inspection of the structure of the compound to be synthesized will provide the identity of each substituent group.
  • the identity of the final product will generally render apparent the identity of the necessary starting materials by a simple process of inspection, given the examples herein.
  • a "beta-keto compound” is a compound that has a structure which includes a first carbonyl group and a second carbonyl group that is beta to the first carbonyl; the first carbonyl is typically part of an ester or amide group.
  • X is a nitrogen and R 2 and R 3 may be substituents (such as are described elsewhere herein) bound to the nitrogen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto amide.
  • X taken together with R 3 is an oxygen and R 2 may be a substituent (such as described elsewhere herein) bound to the oxygen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto ester.
  • the 5-aminotetrazole (850 mg; 10.0 mmole) is dissolved in hot ethanol (25 ml) with triethylamine (1.8 mmole; 0.25 ml). When all solids are dissolved (about ten minutes of heating at 82 0 C), 1-naphthaldehyde ( 1.36 ml; 10.0 mmole) is added followed by ethyl isopropylacetoacetate (1.60 ml; 10.0 mmole). The clear solution is maintained at reflux for 15 h. The ethanol is removed in vacuo and the residue is dissolved in ethyl acetate.
  • the ethyl acetate phase is added to a separatory funnel and subsequently washed with IM HCl, water, then brine.
  • the organic phase is dried over MgSO 4 and filtered.
  • the organic phase is reduced in volume in vacuo to get an oil.
  • a 1:1 mixture of ethyl acetate and hexanes was added to the viscous oil and stirred with a spatula to provide a precipitate.
  • the solid was filtered to provide the product (0.70Og, 19%) as a white powder.
  • Example 1C Preparation of a compound of Formula (II) varying R4, R5, R6 [0114] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples IA and IB above, but replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula Ri- C(O)H and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds having the necessary substituents to result in the indicated products, the following compounds of Formula (II) were prepared: Table 1: ID
  • PT-nnn Name of Compound PT nm 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalen-l-yl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate - .
  • 6-carboxylate PT m S ethyl 5-methyl-7-(3-methylbenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
  • PT 091 isopropyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate tert-butyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetra
  • 6-carboxylate PT n4_l benzyl 5-methyl-7-(3-methylbenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate P T n /i ⁇ benzyl 7-(benzofuran-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT ( VLfi 4-cyanobenzyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine -6 -carboxylate PT n47 R)-l-phenylethyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT n_lS (S)
  • PT-072 9-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5,6,7,9-tetrahydrotetrazolo[5,l-b]quinazolin-8(4H)-one
  • PT 1 Q 9 ⁇ thyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate
  • PT 1 Q f 9-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5,6,7,9-tetrahydrotetrazolo[5,l-b]quinazolin-8(4H)-one
  • PT 1 Q 9 ⁇ thyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate
  • Q f 9 ⁇ thyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrot
  • 6-carboxylate _ benzyl 5-methyl-7-(4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate , __ benzyl 5-methyl-7-(4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ⁇ S Q benzyl 5-methyl-7-(4-(trifluoromethylthio)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ⁇ 64 benzyl 5-methyl-7-(thiazol-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate p ⁇ _ , _ benzyl 5-methyl-7-(thiazol-5-yl)
  • 6-carboxylate PT 409 benzyl 7-(4-(lH-imidazol-l-yl)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine -6 -carboxylate PT 4f ) S benzyl 7-(4-(2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 406 benzyl 7-(4-(2-methoxyethoxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 408 benzyl 7-(4-(dimethylamino)-2-methoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6
  • 6-carboxylate PT 460 ethyl 5-methyl-7-(2-(pyridin-4-yl)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-
  • 6-carboxylate PT 461 ethyl 5-methyl-7-(2-(pyrimidin-5-yl)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 462 ethyl 5-methyl-7-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-
  • 6-carboxylate PT 464 ethyl 5-methyl-7-(3-phenoxyphenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate ethyl 7-(2-(lH-l,2,4-triazol-l-yl)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate ethyl 7-(2-(lH-imidazol-l-yl)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate hydrochloride .
  • the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example IA.
  • Example ID Preparation of a compound of Formula (II) varying R4, R5, R6 [0116] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples IA and IB above, but optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula Ri-C(O)H and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds, further compounds of Formula (II) may be prepared.
  • Beta-keto compounds such as the beta-keto compound (3) in Example 1 used in the synthesis of compounds of the invention typically are either purchased commercially or may be synthesized using known methods. An example of one synthesis is described here: [0118] Synthesis of benzyl 3-oxybutanoate: diketene benzyl alcohol 1 8h benzyl 3-oxobutanoate
  • beta-keto compound products may be obtained by essentially following the procedure set out in this Example above, but optionally replacing the benzyl alcohol with another alcohol (e.g. having the general structure HO- R', where R' may be, e.g. optionally substituted alkyl) or with an amine (e.g. having the general structure H-NR' R", wherein R' and R" may be, e.g. independently hydrogen or optionally substituted alkyl, or R' and R" taken together with the nitrogen may form a heterocyclic ring).
  • another alcohol is used, the product will be a beta- ketoester; and if an amine is used, the product will be a beta-ketoamide.
  • the benzyl alcohol may be replaced with 4-chlorobenzyl amine, in which case the product of the above reaction is 4-chlorobenzyl 3-oxobutanoate.
  • DMAP is not necessary and the products are typically solids.
  • the synthesis for this reaction essentially follows the procedure for synthesis of beta-keto amides as described earlier in this Example, but with the replacement of the amine by the hydrazide.
  • the R' group may be, e.g. optionally substituted lower alkyl, benzyl, phenylethyl, or other substituent group.
  • still other beta-keto compounds such as the beta-keto compound (3) in Example 1 may be obtained by essentially following the procedure set out in this Example above, but replacing the starting materials with other alcohol, amine, or hydrazide starting materials.
  • Aldehyde compounds such as the aldehyde (2) in Example 1 used in the synthesis of compounds of the invention typically are either purchased commercially or may be synthesized using known methods. An example of one synthesis is described here:
  • Salicylaldehyde 50 mmoles was dissolved in dry dimethylformamide (DMF) (100 ml) at room temperature. Benzyl bromide (75 mmoles) was then added followed by the potassium carbonate (125 mmoles) and the mixture stirred at room temperature for 48h. The mixture is then filtered to remove the potassium carbonate and the filtrate is mixed with ethyl acetate. The organic phase is washed with water (3 x 200 ml), brine and dried over MgSO 4 . The solution is then filtered and evaporated in vacuo to provide the crude material. Solid products are washed with ethyl ether to provide the clean desired product or in the case of aldehydes which are oils, they are purified by silica gel chromatography.
  • DMF dry dimethylformamide
  • various different product aldehydes may be obtained by essentially following the procedure set out in this Example above, but optionally replacing the salicylaldehyde with a substituted salicylaldehyde and/or optionally replacing the benzyl bromide with a substituted benzyl bromide.
  • the benzylbromide may be replaced with ethyl 4-(bromomethyl)benzoate, in which case the product of the above reaction is ethyl 4-((2-formylphenoxy)methyl)benzoate.
  • the salicylaldehyde may be replaced with 5-bromo-2- hydroxybenzaldehyde or 2-hydroxy-4-methoxybenzaldehyde, in which case the product of the above reaction is 2-(benzyloxy)-5-bromobenzaldehyde or 2-(benzyloxy)-4- methoxybenzaldehyde, respectively.
  • still other aldehyde products e.g. compounds of the general formula Ri-C(O)H
  • the aminopyrazole (5) is reacted with an aldehyde (2) and a beta-keto compound (3) to give the product (6), which is a compound of Formula (III).
  • the necessary starting materials (2), (3) and (5) may be determined by inspection.
  • X is a nitrogen and R 2 and R 3 may be substituents (such as are described elsewhere herein) bound to the nitrogen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto amide.
  • X taken together with R 3 is an oxygen and R 2 may be a substituent (such as described elsewhere herein) bound to the oxygen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto ester.
  • the mixture was cooled to room temperature and the ethanol stripped in vacuo, and the crude viscous material was purified on a 150g Si ⁇ 2 flash column using 30% ethyl acetate: hexanes as eluent.
  • the purified material was washed with a 1:1 mixture of ethyl ether and hexanes in a filter funnel to provide the desired product (6).
  • Example 4B Preparation of a compound of Formula (III) in which R4 is napthyl, R5 is ethoxy, and R6 is methyl
  • the crude viscous material was purified on a 150g Si ⁇ 2 flash column using 30% ethyl acetate: hexanes as eluent.
  • the purified material was washed with a 1:1 mixture of ethyl ether and hexanes in a filter funnel to provide the desired product (0.422 mg, 12%) as a white powder.
  • Example 4C Preparation of a compound of Formula (III) varying R4 and R5 [0132] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 4A and 4B above, but optionally replacing the aminopyrazole (5) with other aminopyrazoles having the general structure (5) set out in Example 4A, and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula R 1 -C(O)H, and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds (e.g. acetoacetate or acetoacetamide) having the necessary substituents to result in the indicated products, the following compounds of Formula (III) were prepared:
  • the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example 4A.
  • Example 4D Preparation of a compound of Formula (III) varying R4 and R5 [0134] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 4A and 4B above, but optionally replacing the aminopyrazole (5) with other aminopyrazoles having the general structure (5) set out in Example 4A, and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula Ri-C(O)H and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds, further compounds of Formula (III) may be prepared.
  • the aminopyrazole (7) is reacted with an aldehyde (2) and a beta-keto compound (3) to give the product (8), which is a compound of Formula (IV).
  • the necessary starting materials (2), (3) and (7) may be determined by inspection.
  • X is a nitrogen and R 2 and R 3 may be substituents (such as are described elsewhere herein) bound to the nitrogen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto amide.
  • X taken together with R 3 is an oxygen and R 2 may be a substituent (such as described elsewhere herein) bound to the oxygen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto ester.
  • R5 and R6 together form a bridging group
  • the beta-keto compound is a cyclic compound, such as a cyclic amide or cyclic ester.
  • the final product is a compound of Formula (IV) in which R5 and R6 taken together form a bridging group, such as -0-CH 2 - (as shown below). The synthesis of one such compound is described here.
  • Example 5D Preparation of a compound of Formula (IV) varying R4 and R5 [0142] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 5A, 5B and 5C above, but optionally replacing the aminopyrazole (7) with other aminopyrazoles having the general structure (7) set out in Example 5A, and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula Ri- C(O)H, and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds (e.g. acetoacetate or acetoacetamide or cyclic amide or cyclic ester) having the necessary substituents to result in the indicated products, the following compounds of Formula (IV) were prepared:
  • PT-084 4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-7,8-dihydro-lH-furo[3,4-e]pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridin-5(4H)-one p T ns _ methyl 4-(4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5-oxo-4,5,7,8-tetrahydro-lH-furo[3,4-b]pyrazolo[4,3- e]pyridin-3-yl)benzoate .
  • 2-methyl-l-phenylpropan-2-yl 4-(2-bromophenyl)-6-methyl-4,7-dihydro-lH- pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5-carboxylate
  • PT-302 4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-l-phenyl-lH-furo[3,4-e]pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridin-5(7H)-one p ⁇ ⁇ . - benzyl 3,6-dimethyl-4-(naphthalen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5- carboxylate ,- benzyl 4-(2-((R)-3-(ethoxycarbonyl)piperidin-l-yl)-4-methoxyphenyl)-6-methyl-4,7- dihydro- 1 H-pyrazolo [3 ,4-b]pyridine-5 -carboxylate benzyl 4-(2-bromophenyl)-6-methyl-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5- carboxylate benzyl 4-(4-(dimethylamino)n
  • the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example 5 A.
  • Example 5E Preparation of a compound of Formula (IV) varying R4, R5, R6 [0144] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 5A, 5B and 5C above, but optionally replacing the aminopyrazole (7) with other aminopyrazoles having the general structure (7) set out in Example 5A, and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula R 1 - C(O)H and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds (e.g. acetoacetate or acetoacetamide or cyclic amide or cyclic ester), further compounds of Formula (IV) may be prepared.
  • the aminopyrazole (7) with other aminopyrazoles having the general structure (7) set out in Example 5A
  • the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula R 1 - C(O)H
  • beta-keto compound (3) e.g. acetoacetate or acetoacetamide or cycl
  • the 2-aminoimidazole (9) is reacted with an aldehyde (2) and a beta-keto compound (3) to give the product (10), which is a compound of Formula (V).
  • the necessary starting materials (2), (3) and (9) may be determined by inspection.
  • X is a nitrogen and R 2 and R 3 may be substituents (such as are described elsewhere herein) bound to the nitrogen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto amide.
  • X taken together with R 3 is an oxygen and R 2 may be a substituent (such as described elsewhere herein) bound to the oxygen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto ester.
  • Example 6B Preparation of a compound of Formula (V) in which R4 is napthyl, R5 is benzyloxy, and R6 is methyl
  • Example 6C Preparation of a compound of Formula (V) varying R4 and R5 [0148] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 6A and 6B above, but optionally replacing the 2-aminoimidazole (9) with other 2- aminoimidazoles having the general structure (9) set out in Example 6A, and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula Ri- C(O)H, and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds (e.g. acetoacetate or acetoacetamide) having the necessary substituents to result in the indicated products, the following compounds of Formula (V) were prepared:
  • the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example 6A.
  • Example 6D Preparation of a compound of Formula (V) varying R4 and R5 [0150] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 6A and 6B above, but optionally replacing the 2-aminoimidazole (9) with other 2- aminoimidazoles having the general structure (9) set out in Example 6A, and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula Ri- C(O)H and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds, further compounds of Formula (V) may be prepared.
  • EXAMPLE 7 Preparation of a compound of Formula (V) varying R4 and R5
  • Example 7A General method for synthesis of compounds of Formula (VI)
  • the 1,3-cyclohexanedione (11) is reacted with an aldehyde (2) and a beta-keto compound (3) to give the product (12), which is a compound of Formula (VI).
  • the necessary starting materials (2), (3) and (11) may be determined by inspection.
  • X is a nitrogen and R 2 and R 3 may be substituents (such as are described elsewhere herein) bound to the nitrogen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto amide.
  • X taken together with R 3 is an oxygen and R 2 may be a substituent (such as described elsewhere herein) bound to the oxygen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto ester.
  • the material is either taken up in ethyl acetate or ethyl ether and crystallization is initiated with scratching or letting the solution sit overnight at room temperature. If the above procedure does not work, the material is purified on a silica gel flash column to provide the purified desired product.
  • Example 7B Preparation of a compound of Formula (VI) in which R4 is 5- phenylthiophen-2-yl, R5 is ethoxy, and R6 is propyl
  • Example 7C Preparation of a compound of Formula (VI) varying R4, R5, R6, R24" [0157] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 7A and 7B above, but optionally replacing the 1,3-cyclohexanedione (11) with another 1,3- cyclohexanedione having the general structure (11) set out in Example 7A (or replacing it with a 1,3-cyclopentanedione having the general structure (13), as explained at the end of Example 7A), and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula R 1 -C(O)H, and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds (e.g. acetoacetate or acetoacetamide) having the necessary substituents to result in the indicated products, the following compounds of Formula (VI) were prepared:
  • ⁇ _ ethyl 4-(6-methoxynaphthalen-2-yl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate . .
  • ethyl 4-(4,7-dimethoxynaphthaleri-l-yl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate
  • Q em yl 4-(4-(dimethylamino)naphthalen-l-yl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate
  • PT- 140 ethyl 2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydro-4,5'-biquinoline-3-carboxylate 1 41 ethyl 7,7-dimethyl-5-oxo-4-(5-phenylthiophen-2-yl)-2-propyl-l,4,5,6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate
  • PT- 142 ethyl 2-methyl-5-oxo-4-(thiophen-2-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate
  • PT- 143 ethyl 2-methyl-5-oxo-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate PT ⁇ ⁇ . ⁇ .
  • PT- 148 ethyl 5-oxo-2-propyl-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate
  • PT 14 Q em yl 5-0X0-7 -phenyl-2-propyl-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate p ⁇ 1 ⁇ r .
  • 1,4,5,6,7, 8-hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate 1 fi isopropyl 2,7,7-trimethyl-4-(5-methyl-l-o-tolyl-lH-pyrazol-4-yl)-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate
  • PT 169 isopropyl 2,7,7-trimethyl-5-oxo-4-(3-(thiophen-2-yl)-lH-pyrazol-4-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate p ⁇ 1 ,_ 2-methyl-3-(4-phenylpiperidine-l-carbonyl)-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-4,6,7,8- tetrahydroquinolin-5( lH)-one PT 1 f.zl 2-methyl-5-oxo-N-(4-phenylbutyl)
  • PT- 190 ethyl 2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydro-4,4'-biquinoline-3-carboxylate p ⁇ , , ⁇ - 2-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-3-(piperidine-l-carbonyl)-4,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinolin-
  • PT-336 benzyl 4-(biphenyl-2-yl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate
  • PT 4S9 ethyl 4-(4-(2-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carbonyl)piperazin- 1 -yl)benzoate
  • the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example 7A.
  • Example 7D Preparation of a compound of Formula (VI) varying R4, R5, R6 [0159] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 7A and 7B above, but optionally replacing the 1,3-cyclohexanedione (11) with another 1,3- cyclohexanedione having the general structure (11) set out in Example 7A (or replacing it with a 1,3-cyclopentanedione having the general structure (13), as explained at the end of Example 7A), and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula Ri-C(O)H and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds , further compounds of Formula (VI) may be prepared.
  • Example 8 A General method for synthesis of compounds of Formula (I)
  • the aldehyde (2) is reacted with a beta-keto compound (3) to give the product (15), which is a compound of Formula (I).
  • the necessary starting materials (2) and (3) may be determined by inspection.
  • X is a nitrogen and R 2 and R 3 may be substituents (such as are described elsewhere herein) bound to the nitrogen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta- keto amide.
  • X taken together with R 3 is an oxygen and R 2 may be a substituent (such as described elsewhere herein) bound to the oxygen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto ester.
  • Example 8B Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) in which R2 is propyl, R3 is ethoxycarbonyl, R4 is 5-bromothiophen-2-yl, R5 is ethoxy, and R6 is propyl [0162] Synthesis of diethyl 4-(5-bromothiophen-2-yl)-2,6-dipropyl-l,4- dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate (PT-182):
  • Example 8C Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) varying R2, R3, R4, R5, R6 [0164] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 8A and 8B above, but optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula R 1 -C(O)H, and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds (e.g. acetoacetate or acetoacetamide) having the necessary substituents to result in the indicated products, the following compounds of Formula (I) were prepared: Table 7:
  • PT-110 diethyl 2,6-dimethyl-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate
  • PT-111 diethyl 2,6-dimethyl-4-(thiophen-2-yl)-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate
  • P T 1 1 9 5-(3,5-bis(ethoxycarbonyl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridin-4-yl)thiophene-2- carboxylic acid
  • PT- 113 diethyl 4-(5-ethylthiophen-2-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate
  • PT- 114 diethyl 4-(benzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate
  • PT- 115 diethyl 4-(benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate
  • PT 1 fi diethyl 2,6-dimethyl-4-(3-methylbenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5- dicarboxylate
  • PT- 120 diethyl 4-(furan-3-yl)-2,6-dimethyl- 1 ,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate
  • PT- 121 diethyl 4-(5-ethylfuran-2-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate
  • PT- 122 diethyl 4-(benzofuran-2-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate
  • PT- 123 diisopropyl 2,6-dimethyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate
  • PT- 182 diethyl 4-(5-bromothiophen-2-yl)-2,6-dipropyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate substituted for diethyl 4-(5-bromothiophen-2-yl)-2,6-diisopropyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5- dicarboxylate
  • the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example 8A.
  • Example 8D Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) varying R2, R3, R4, R5, R6 [0166] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Example 8A and 8B above, but optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula Ri-C(O)H, and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds (e.g. acetoacetate or acetoacetamide), further compounds of Formula (I) may be prepared.
  • the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula Ri-C(O)H
  • beta-keto compound (3) e.g. acetoacetate or acetoacetamide
  • the necessary starting materials (2), (11), and (16a) or (16b) may be determined by inspection.
  • the crude reaction is reduced in vacuo and dissolved in ethyl acetate. It is washed with water then brine. The organic phase is decanted and reduced in vacuo to provide solid material. It is filtered and washed with ethyl ether to provide clean desired material.
  • Example 9B Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) in which R4 is phenyl, R3 is ethoxycarbonyl, R2 is amino, and R5 and R6 taken together form a bridging group [0171] Synthesis of ethyl 2-amino-5-oxo-4-phenyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-4H-chromene-3- carboxylate (PT-097):
  • Example 9C Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) in which R4 is furan-2-yl, R3 is cvano, R2 is amino, R5 is ethoxy, and R6 is methyl
  • This example describes a synthesis that is essentially similar to Examples 9A and 9B, except the cyclic diones of Examples 9A and 9B are replaced in this Example with an open-chain (non-cyclic) beta-ketoester.
  • This example describes a synthesis that is essentially similar to Examples 9A and 9B above, except the cyclic diones of Examples 9A and 9B are replaced in this Example with an open-chain (non-cyclic) beta-ketoester, providing for a product in which R5 and R6 do not form a bridging group.
  • the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example 9A.
  • PT-029 200 mg; 0.38 mmole was dissolved in dry DME (4ml) and dry DMF (0.5ml) while heating to 50 0 C. After dissolution, the solution was cooled to room temperature and para-methoxyphenylboronic acid (145 mg; 0.95 mmole) was added followed by 1.0 ml of a 2M Na 2 CO 3 solution, then Pd(Cl) 2 (PPh 3 ) 2 (70 mg; 0.1 mmole). The mixture was then heated at 82°C for 15h. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and ethyl acetate was added.
  • the organic phase was washed with saturated NaHCO 3 solution, and the organic phase was separated and dried over MgSO 4 The organic phase was filtered from the magnesium sulfate and then evaporated in vacuo.
  • Example IQD Preparation of a compounds using Suzuki coupling procedure to modify a halo-aryl group
  • 6-carboxylate PT 94S 2'-(3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-2-methyl-5-oxo- 1,4,5, 6,7, 8-hexahydroquinolin-4- yl)biphenyl-3-carboxylic acid
  • PT 940 2'-(3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinolin-4- yl)biphenyl-4-carboxylic acid - _
  • PT-435 diethyl 4-(3'-cyanobiphenyl-2-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT _1S1 ethyl 4-(3'-acetylbiphenyl-2-yl)-6-methyl-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5- carboxylate PT 4SS ethyl 4-(4'-carbamoylbiphenyl-2-yl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate PT 4 7 1 ethyl 6-methyl-4-(4'-(methylsulfonamido)biphenyl-2-yl)-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4- b]pyridine-5-carboxylate PT A Q & ethyl 7
  • Example IQE Preparation of a compounds using Suzuki coupling procedure to modify a halo-aryl group
  • Example 1 IB Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) varying Rl [0194] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures described above in Example 1 IA, other examples of Compounds of Formula (I) in which the Rl group is varied may be made. The compounds in the following table were made by essentially following the procedures described above in Example 1 IA, with modifications described below.
  • the parent compound (the compound of Formula (I) in which the Q2 group is >N-H) was first prepared as described in Examples 1-10 and elsewhere herein. The parent compound (1.0 mmole) was then dissolved in dry DMF (5ml) at room temperature. The (optionally substituted) alkyl halide compound was then added (10.0 mmole).
  • alkyl halide compounds employed included bromoacetonitrile (for product in which Rl is -CH 2 -CN); t-butyl bromoacetate (for product in which Rl is -CH 2 -C(O)Ot-Bu); ethyl bromoacetate (for product in which Rl is -CH 2 -C(O)O-Et); 2-chloro-N-(2,6-dimethylphenyl)acetamide (for product in which Rl is -CH 2 -C(O)-NH-(2,6-dimethylphenyl).
  • Addition of the alkyl halide compound was followed by addition of potassium ⁇ -butoxide (5.0 mmole).
  • the corresponding t-butyl ester is first prepared as described in this Example, and the t- butyl ester is then hydrolysed, for example in aqueous HCl, to provide the product compound.
  • the preparation of the compound may proceed by first forming a carboxylic ester, followed by cleavage of the ester, e.g.
  • the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example 1 IA and 1 IB.
  • Example 12A Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) with a pendant tetrazolo substituent
  • Example 12B Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) with a pendant tetrazolo substituent
  • the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example 12A.
  • Example 1OA The procedure in Example 1OA was followed (same scale) except using para- methoxycarbonylphenylboronic acid as the coupling partner to provide the PT-200 product in 21% yield.
  • PT 1 86 7-amino-5-(4-bromophenyl)-l,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-pyrano[2,3- d]pyrimidine-6-carbonitrile p T 1 Q .
  • PT- 204 ethyl 6-methyl-2-oxo-4-(thiophen-2-yl)-l,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate
  • PT 90S 5-(5-(ethoxycarbonyl)-6-methyl-2-oxo-l,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidiii-4-yl)thiophene-2- carboxylic acid
  • PT 906 em yl 4-(5-bromothiophen-2-yl)-6-methyl-2-oxo-l,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5- carboxylate - .
  • PT- 208 ethyl 6-methyl-2-oxo-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-l,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate
  • PT 209 ethyl 2 - ox °- 6 -P ro Py 1 - 4 -(5-(2-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)furan-2-yl)-l,2,3,4- tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate
  • PT- 220 3-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,5-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridin-6(7H)-one
  • PT- 221 4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-l-phenyl-4,5-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridin-6(7H)-one
  • Example compounds were synthesized using methods disclosed herein or methods which will be readily apparent given the disclosure herein and methods well known in the art. A list of such example compounds is given in Tables accompanying the Examples. In typical embodiments, the present invention includes a compound listed in the Tables accompanying the Examples (e.g. Tables 1-14. For ease of reference herein, each compound in the Tables has an assigned identifier ("PT-nnn”), and the compounds may be referred to herein by the identifier.
  • PT-nnn identifier
  • the late sodium current (Late INa) and peak sodium current (Peak INa) assays are performed on an automated electrophysiology platform, PatchXpress 7000A (MDS Analytical Technologies, Sunnyvale, CA), which uses the whole cell patch clamp technique to measure currents through the cell membrane of up to 16 cells at a time.
  • the assay uses an HEK293 (human embryonic kidney) cell line heterologously expressing the wild-type human cardiac sodium channel, hNa v 1.5, purchased from Millipore (Billerica, MA). No beta subunits were coexpressed with the Na channel alpha subunit. Cells are maintained with standard tissue culture procedures and stable channel expression is maintained with 400 ⁇ g/ml Geneticin in the culture medium.
  • the extracellular solution for screening Peak INa is composed of: 20 mM NaCl, 120 mM N-methyl-D glucamine, 4 mM KCl, 1.8 mM CaCl 2 , 0.75 mM MgCl 2 , and 5 mM HEPES with pH adjusted to 7.4 using HCl.
  • the intracellular solution used to perfuse the inside of the cells for both the Late INa and Peak INa assays contains: 120 mM CsF, 20 mM CsCl, 5 mM EGTA, 5 mM HEPES and pH adjusted to 7.4 with CsOH.
  • Compounds are diluted in extracellular solution to 10 ⁇ M in glass vials and then transferred to glass well plates before robotic addition to the cells.
  • the ONa extracellular solution used at the end of each experiment for the Late INa and Peak INa assays to measure baseline current contains: 140 mM N-methyl-D-glucamine; 4 mM KCl; 1.8 mM CaCl 2 ; 0.75 mM MgCl 2 ; 5 mM HEPES and pH was adjusted to 7.4 with HCl.
  • Late INa Screening Assay :
  • Late INa assay sodium channels are activated every 10 seconds (0.1 Hz) by depolarizing the cell membrane to -20 mV for 250 milliseconds (ms) from a holding potential of -120 mV.
  • typical Na v 1.5 sodium currents activate rapidly to a peak negative current and then inactivate nearly completely within 3-4 ms (see Figure 1).
  • Late INa current is generated by adding 10 ⁇ M Tefluthrin (pyrethroid) to the extracellular solution while recording Na currents.
  • the black traces (designated by the arrow, 101) are Na current measured before addition of Tefluthrin and the gray traces (designated by the arrow, 102) are measured after Tefluthrin addition.
  • 50 nM ATX II (sea anemone toxin), another late INa activator, was used to generate the late component. Both activators generate late components that are large enough that block of the late component by compounds can be measured easily.
  • late INa is defined as the mean current between 225 ms and 250 ms after stepping to -20 mV to activate Na channels.
  • late INa activators are added to each well 4 times over a 16-17 minute period so that the late component of the Na current reaches a stable value.
  • Compounds are then added (typically at 10 ⁇ M), in the presence of late INa activator, with 3 additions over the course of 7 or 8 minutes. Measurements are made typically at the end of exposure to the third compound addition.
  • Baseline current in the absence of Na + ions is measured at the end of each experiment (after two additions of ONa solution-see above) and is used to calculate the percent block by compound.
  • Peak INa Compounds were also evaluated for their effect in several other assays, including their effect on Peak INa.
  • the effect on Peak INa was measured using data from the Late INa assay.
  • peak currents were often too large to make this possible, requiring a separate assay to evaluate the effect on peak INa. Since the peak INa can be very large, introducing artifacts in the recording, the concentration of Na + in the bath is reduced to 20 mM and a nonpermeant cation is added to compensate for the Na + that was omitted from the standard extracellular solution (see above).
  • the peak INa assay uses a holding potential of -100 mV and a 20 ms test pulse to 0 mV to activate the channel.
  • both tonic (TB) block and use-dependent (UDB) block of peak inward sodium current by 10 ⁇ M compound are determined.
  • TB is block of the channel in the resting state, before the channel opens.
  • TB is simulated in this assay by stimulating the channel to open at a low frequency (0.1 Hz). This is done in order to measure the control current amplitude and monitor current rundown, enabling correction for rundown in the calculation of percent block for TB.
  • UDB is measured by stimulating the channel to open at a higher frequency (3 Hz) and is used to determine accumulated block in activated states by compound. Activating the channel at this higher frequency typically also decreases the peak current some even in the absence of compound. Therefore, the assay is designed to measure the use-dependent decrease in peak both in the absence and in the presence of compound, and the calculation of UDB corrects the decrease in current measured in the presence of compound for the decrease in current in the absence of compound ( Figure 6). [0242] After establishing the whole cell recording configuration, currents are allowed to stabilize for 6-10 minutes while channels are activated briefly at 0.1 Hz. This is followed by a 2 minute stimulation at 3 Hz and then a 2 minute stimulation at 0.1 Hz before addition of compound.
  • Compound is added 3 times over a period of 2 to 3 minutes and channels are exposed to compound for 8 to 9 minutes before another round of high frequency stimulation at 3 Hz for 2 minutes.
  • ONa extracellular solution is added two times at the end to establish the baseline current and demonstrate the quality of solution exchange and the recording.
  • hERG channel is heterologously expressed in a CHO (Chinese Hamster Ovary) cell line.
  • CHO Choinese Hamster Ovary
  • Cells are maintained with standard tissue culture procedures and stable channel expression is maintained with 500 ⁇ g/ml G418 in the culture medium.
  • Cells are harvested for testing on the PatchXpress automated patch clamp with Accumax (Innovative Cell Technologies, San Diego, CA) to isolate single cells.
  • Accumax Innovative Cell Technologies, San Diego, CA
  • the external solution contains: 2 mM CaCl 2 ; 2 mM MgCl 2 ; 4 mM KCl; 150 mM NaCl; 10 mM Glucose; 10 mM HEPES (pH 7.4 with IM NaOH, osmolarity).
  • the internal solution contains: 140 mM KCl, 10 mM MgCl 2 , 6 mM EGTA, 5 mM HEPES, 5 mM ATP (pH adjusted to 7.25 with KOH).
  • hERG channels are activated when the voltage is stepped to +20 mV from the - 80 mV holding potential (see Figure 3). During a 5 second step at +20 mV, the channels activate and then largely inactivate, so the currents are relatively small. Upon returning to -50 mV from +20 mV, hERG currents transiently become much larger as inactivation is rapidly removed and then the channel closes.
  • the first step to -50 mV for 300 ms is used as a baseline for measuring the peak amplitude during the step to -50 mV after channel activation. The peak current at -50 mV is measured both under control conditions and after addition of compound.
  • All compounds are prepared as 10 mM DMSO stocks in glass vials. Stock solutions are mixed by vigorous vortexing and sonication for about 2 minutes at room temperature. For testing, compounds are diluted in glass vials using an intermediate dilution step in pure DMSO and then further diluted to working concentrations in external solution. Dilutions are prepared no longer than 20 minutes before use. [0247] After achieving the whole-cell configuration, cells are monitored for 90 seconds to assess stability and washed with external solution for 66 seconds. The voltage protocol described above is then applied to the cells every 12 seconds and throughout the whole procedure. Only cells with stable recording parameters and meeting specified health criteria are allowed to enter the compound addition procedure.
  • External solution containing 0.1% DMSO (vehicle) is applied to the cells first to establish the control peak current amplitude. After allowing the current to stabilize for 3 to 5 minutes, 1 ⁇ M and then 10 ⁇ M test compounds are applied. Each compound concentration is added 4 times and cells are kept in test solution until the effect of the compound reaches steady state or for a maximum of 12 minutes. After addition of test compound, a positive control (1 ⁇ M Cisapride) is added and must block >95% of the current for the experiment to be considered valid. Washout in the external solution compartment is performed until the recovery of the current reaches steady state. Data are analyzed using DataXpress, Clampfit (Molecular Devices, Inc., Sunnyvale) and Origin 7 (Originlab Corp.)
  • IMR-32 human neuroblastoma cells were obtained from The American Type Culture Collection. The cells were maintained in MEM supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum, 2 mM of L-glutamine, 100 IU/ml of penicillin, 50 ⁇ g/ml of streptomycin, 1 % of sodium pyruvate, 1 % of sodium bicarbonate and 1 % of nonessential amino acid. The cells were cultured at 37°C in a humidified 5% CO 2 /95% air incubator. Culture medium was changed every two days and cells were recultivated when they reached 70-80% confluent.
  • IMR-32 cells were seeded on a Microtest 96-well Assay Plate (BD FALCONTM) at a density of 200,000 cells/well in 200 ⁇ l culture medium for overnight. The culture medium was removed, and replaced by 120 ⁇ l Ca-4 dye (MDS Analytical Technologies, Sunnyvale, CA) in HBSS (Ix Hank's Balanced Salt solution plus 20 mM HEPES, pH 7.4) containing 2 mM probenecid. Cells were then incubated for 1 hour at 37 ° in incubator. Testing compounds were diluted from 5 ⁇ M - 50 ⁇ M in HBSS, and 40 ⁇ l were added in cells before assay.
  • Ca-4 dye MDS Analytical Technologies, Sunnyvale, CA
  • HBSS Ix Hank's Balanced Salt solution plus 20 mM HEPES, pH 7.4
  • L-type calcium channel activities (Max - Min) were measured after addition of 40 ⁇ l of 1 ⁇ M (-)Bay K 8644 plus 50 mM KCl (final concentration) using FlexStation (Molecular Devices) immediately after addition of testing compounds. The inhibition of L-type calcium channel activity by compounds was then calculated.
  • Figure 4 shows results of the assay for four compounds tested and the controls. The four compounds were Test(a) - PT-163; Test(b) - PT-108; Test(c) - PT-181; and Test(d) - PT-113.
  • Compounds are screened to test for block of human cardiac L-type calcium channels (hCavl.2, encoded by the human CACNAlC gene and coexpressed with the beta 2 subunit, encoded by the human CACNB2 gene) expressed in an HEK293 cell line.
  • Stable transfectants were selected using antibiotic resistance genes incorporated into the expression plasmids and selection pressure is maintained with selection antibiotics added to the culture medium.
  • Cells are cultured using standard tissue culture methods for HEK293 cells.
  • Cells are harvested for addition to a PatchXpress automated patch clamp system.
  • the external solution contains: 137 mM NaCl; 4 mM KCl; 1.8 mM CaCl 2 ; 1 mM MgCl 2 ; 10 mM HEPES; 10 mM Glucose (pH adjusted to 7.4 with NaOH).
  • the internal solution contains: 130 mM Cs Aspartate; 5 mM MgCl 2 ; 5 mM EGTA; 4 mM ATP; 0.1 mM GTP; 10 mM HEPES (pH adjusted to 7.2 with N-methyl-D-glucamine).
  • Test compound stock solutions are prepared in dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) and stored frozen. Test compound concentrations are prepared fresh daily by diluting stock solutions into the external HEPES -buffered physiological saline solution described above. Previous results have shown that ⁇ 0.3% DMSO does not affect channel current, so all test formulations contain 0.3% DMSO. Each test compound formulation is sonicated (Model 2510/5510, Branson Ultrasonics, Danbury, CT), at ambient room temperature for at least 20 minutes to facilitate dissolution.
  • DMSO dimethyl sulfoxide
  • a glass-lined 96-well compound plate is loaded with the appropriate amounts of test and control solutions, and placed in the plate well of PatchXpress® (Model 7000A, MDS Analytical Technologies, Sunnyvale, CA).
  • PatchXpress® Model 7000A, MDS Analytical Technologies, Sunnyvale, CA.
  • a compound having an activity of reducing late sodium current will also exhibit little or no activity with regard to the hERG potassium channel.
  • a compound having an activity of reducing late sodium current will also exhibit little or no activity with regard to the L-type calcium channel.
  • a given compound may provide a 30% (or greater, e.g. more than 40%, more than 50%, more than 60%, more than 70%, more than 80%) reduction in late sodium current in the assay described herein, and the same compound may exhibit little or no activity for one or more of the peak sodium current, the hERG potassium channel, and the L-type calcium channel.
  • a compound having "little" effect will typically show less then a 30% reduction (e.g.
  • any activity measured will differ from the control by less than the standard error of the measurement.
  • the assays conducted to measure activities in this regard should be performed as described above, with the compound at a concentration of 10 ⁇ M (or at the upper limit of solubility, if less).
  • a compound will exhibit a high selectivity for the late sodium current modulatory activity as compared to the activity in one or more other ion channels.
  • the selectivity of a compound may be determined by determining the percentage reduction in late sodium current due to the compound, as measured by the assay described above.
  • the percentage reduction in one other ion channel activity such as the hERG potassium channel or L-type calcium channel, due to the compound is determined as described above.
  • the selectivity is determined by taking the ratio of (percentage reduction in late sodium current) to (percentage reduction in one other ion channel activity).
  • the assays conducted to measure activities in this regard should be performed as described above, with the compound at a concentration of 10 ⁇ M (or at the upper limit of solubility, if less).
  • the selectivity of a compound of the invention will be at least 5: 1, e.g. at least 6:1, at least 7:1, at least 8:1, at least 9:1, at least 10:1, at least 12:1, at least 15:1, at least 20:1, or at least 25:1, when comparing the percentage reduction in late sodium current versus percentage reduction of one of the peak sodium current, the hERG potassium channel current, or the L-type calcium channel.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates to novel heterocyclic compounds and to their use in the treatment of various disease states, including cardiovascular diseases and diabetes. In particular embodiments, the structure of the compounds is given by Formula (I): wherein Q1, Q2, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6 are as described herein. The invention also relates to methods for the preparation of the compounds, and to pharmaceutical compositions containing such compounds.

Description

OPTIONALLY CONDENSED DIHYDROPYRIDINE, DIHYDROPYRIMIDINE AND DIHYDROPYRANE DERIVATIVES ACTING AS LATE SODIUM CHANNEL BLOCKERS
[0001] This application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 60/958,632, filed July 5, 2007, the entirety of which is herein incorporated by reference.
FIELD
[0002] The present invention relates to novel heterocyclic compounds and to their use in the treatment of various disease states, including cardiovascular diseases and diabetes. The invention also relates to methods for their preparation, and to pharmaceutical compositions containing such compounds.
SUMMARY
[0003] Accordingly, in typical embodiments the present invention provides novel substituted heterocyclic compounds that function as late sodium channel blockers. In typical embodiments the invention relates to compounds of Formula (I):
Figure imgf000002_0001
wherein:
Ql is carbon or nitrogen,
Q2 is oxygen or Rl -N<, where Rl is hydrogen or optionally substituted lower alkyl; the double dotted line indicated by the arrow is a single bond or a double bond; R2 is hydrogen, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or -NR21R22, where R21 and R22 are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl;
R3 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, cyano, -C(O)-R31, or -C(O)-O-R31, where R31 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl; or R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is attached form a 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or a saturated or unsaturated carbocyclic moiety, all of which are optionally substituted, for example by halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl;
R4 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl, provided that any substituent of R4 may itself be optionally substituted, for example by halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl;
R5 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -O-R51, or -NR52R53, where R51 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, where R52 and R53 are each independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or R52 and R53 taken together with the nitrogen to which they are both directly attached form 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl moiety, which is optionally substituted by halo, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R6 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl, -NR61R62, where R61 and R62 are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl; or R5 and R6 taken together with the carbons to which R5 and R6 are directly attached and the carbon directly attached to both of the carbons to which R5 and R6 are directly attached form a 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or a saturated or unsaturated carbocyclic moiety, all of which are optionally substituted by halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl.
[0004] In certain embodiments the invention provides pharmaceutical formulations comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula (I) and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient. [0005] Some embodiments provide a method of using the compounds of Formula (I) in the treatment of a disease or condition in a mammal that is amenable to treatment by a late sodium channel blocker. The compounds of the invention and their therapeutically acceptable salts, esters, tautomeric forms are potentially of use as medicaments for the treatment of certain diseases, such as, cardiovascular diseases such as atrial and ventricular arrhythmias, heart failure (including congestive heart failure, diastolic heart failure, systolic heart failure, acute heart failure), Prinzmetal's (variant) angina, stable and unstable angina, exercise induced angina, congestive heart disease, ischemia, recurrent ischemia, reperfusion injury, myocardial infarction, acute coronary syndrome, peripheral arterial disease, and intermittent claudication.. Such diseases may also include diabetes, and conditions related to diabetes, e.g. diabetic peripheral neuropathy. Such diseases may also include conditions affecting the neuromuscular system resulting in pain, seizures, or paralysis.
BREIF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0006] These and other features of the invention will be understood from the description of representative embodiments of the method herein and the disclosure of illustrative materials for carrying out the method, taken together with the Figures, wherein
[0007] Figure 1 shows a typical response due to activation of Nav 1.5 sodium channel in a sodium current assay.
[0008] Figure 2 is a plot of sodium current measured with and without Tefluthrin.
[0009] Figure 3 illustrates hERG channel activation upon application of the indicated potential.
[0010] Figure 4 shows inhibition of L-type calcium channel activity.
[0011] Figure 5 shows typical L-type calcium channel current traces in response to a depolarizing stimulus before and after application of a calcium channel blocker (10 nM and 10 μM nifedipine).
[0012] Figure 6 shows peak INa plotted as a function of experiment time.
Stimulation at 3 Hz is indicated. Calculation of UDB corrects for the decrease in peak in the absence of test compound. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0013] As used in the present specification, the following words and phrases are generally intended to have the meanings as set forth below, except to the extent that the context in which they are used indicates otherwise.
[0014] The term "alkyl" refers to a monoradical branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon chain having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, t-butyl, n-hexyl, n-decyl, tetradecyl, and the like.
[0015] The term "substituted alkyl" refers to:
1) an alkyl group as defined above, having 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents, (typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents) selected from the group consisting of alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxy, keto, thiocarbonyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, arylthio, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, thiol, alkylthio, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonylamino, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-aryl,-SO-heteroaryl, -SO2- alkyl, SO2-aryl and -SO2-heteroaryl. Unless otherwise constrained by the definition, all substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF3, amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -S(O)nR, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2; or
2) an alkyl group as defined above that is interrupted by 1-10 atoms (e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 atoms) independently chosen from oxygen, sulfur and NRa-, where Ra is chosen from hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl. All substituents may be optionally further substituted by alkyl, alkoxy, halogen, CF3, amino, substituted amino, cyano, or -S(O)nR, in which R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2; or
3) an alkyl group as defined above that has both 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents as defined above and is also interrupted by 1-10 atoms (e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 atoms) as defined above. [0016] The term "lower alkyl" refers to a monoradical branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon chain having 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, t- butyl, n-hexyl, and the like.
[0017] The term "substituted lower alkyl" refers to lower alkyl as defined above having 1 to 5 substituents (typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents), as defined for substituted alkyl, or a lower alkyl group as defined above that is interrupted by 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 atoms as defined for substituted alkyl, or a lower alkyl group as defined above that has both 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents as defined above and is also interrupted by 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 atoms as defined above.
[0018] The term "alkylene" refers to a diradical of a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon chain, typically having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms (e.g. 1-10 carbon atoms, or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 carbon atoms). This term is exemplified by groups such as methylene (-CH2-), ethylene (-CH2CH2-), the propylene isomers (e.g., - CH2CH2CH2- and-CH(CH3)CH2-), and the like.
[0019] The term "lower alkylene" refers to a diradical of a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon chain, typically having 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 carbon atoms. [0020] The term "substituted alkylene" refers to:
(1) an alkylene group as defined above having 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents (typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents) selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxy, keto, thiocarbonyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, arylthio, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, thiol, alkylthio, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonylamino, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-aryl,-SO-heteroaryl, -SO2- alkyl, SO2-aryl and -SO2-heteroaryl. Unless otherwise constrained by the definition, all substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF3, amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -S(O)nR, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2; or (2) an alkylene group as defined above that is interrupted by 1-10 groups (e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 groups) independently chosen from -O-, -S-, sulfonyl, -C(O)-, -C(O)O-, -C(O)N-, and -NRa-, where Ra is chosen from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl; or
(3) an alkylene group as defined above that has both 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents as defined above and is also interrupted by 1-10 groups as defined above. Examples of substituted alkylenes are chloromethylene (-CH(Cl)-), aminoethylene (-CH(NH2)CH2-), methylaminoethylene (-CH(NHMe)CH2-), 2- carboxypropylene isomers(-CH2CH(CO2H)CH2-), ethoxyethyl (-CH2CH2O- CH2CH2-), ethylmethylaminoethyl (-CH2CH2-N(CH3)-CH2CH2-), l-ethoxy-2- (2-ethoxy-ethoxy)ethane (-CH2CH2O-CH2CH2-OCH2CH2-OCH2CH2-), and the like.
[0021] The term "aralkyl" refers to an aryl group covalently linked to an alkylene group, where aryl and alkylene are defined herein. "Optionally substituted aralkyl" refers to an optionally substituted aryl group covalently linked to an optionally substituted alkylene group. Such aralkyl groups are exemplified by benzyl, phenylethyl, 3-(4-methoxyphenyl)propyl, and the like.
[0022] The term "alkoxy" refers to the group R-O-, where R is optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl, or R is a group -Y-Z, in which Y is optionally substituted alkylene and Z is optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl; or optionally substituted cycloalkenyl, where alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl and cycloalkenyl are as defined herein. Typical alkoxy groups are alkyl-O- and include, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, iso-propoxy, n- butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexyloxy, 1 ,2-dimethylbutoxy, and the like.
[0023] The term "lower alkoxy" refers to the group R-O- in which R is optionally substituted lower alkyl as defined above. This term is exemplified by groups such as methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, iso-propoxy, n-butoxy, iso-butoxy, t-butoxy, n-hexyloxy, and the like. [0024] The term "alkylthio" refers to the group R-S-, where R is as defined for alkoxy.
[0025] The term "alkenyl" refers to a monoradical of a branched or unbranched unsaturated hydrocarbon group typically having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms (more typically from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, e.g. 2 to 6 carbon atoms) and having from 1 to 6 carbon-carbon double bonds, e.g. 1, 2, or 3 carbon-carbon double bonds. Typical alkenyl groups include ethenyl (or vinyl, i.e. -CH=CH2), 1-propylene (or allyl, - CH2CH=CH2), isopropylene (-C(CH3)=CH2), bicyclo[2.2.1]heptene, and the like. In the event that alkenyl is attached to nitrogen, the double bond cannot be alpha to the nitrogen.
[0026] The term "lower alkenyl" refers to alkenyl as defined above having from 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
[0027] The term "substituted alkenyl" refers to an alkenyl group as defined above having 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents (typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents), selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxy, keto, thiocarbonyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, arylthio, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, thiol, alkylthio, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonylamino, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-aryl,-SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, SO2-aryl and - SO2-heteroaryl. Unless otherwise constrained by the definition, all substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF3, amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -S(O)nR, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2. [0028] The term "alkynyl" refers to a monoradical of an unsaturated hydrocarbon, typically having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms (more typically from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, e.g. 2 to 6 carbon atoms) and having from 1 to 6 carbon-carbon triple bonds e.g. 1, 2, or 3 carbon-carbon triple bonds. Typical alkynyl groups include ethynyl (-C≡CH), propargyl (or propynyl, -C≡CCH3), and the like. In the event that alkynyl is attached to nitrogen, the triple bond cannot be alpha to the nitrogen.
[0029] The term "substituted alkynyl" refers to an alkynyl group as defined above having 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents (typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents), selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxy, keto, thiocarbonyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, arylthio, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, thiol, alkylthio, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonylamino, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-aryl,-SO-heteroaryl, -Sθ2-alkyl, SU2-aryl and - Sθ2-heteroaryl. Unless otherwise constrained by the definition, all substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF3, amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -S(O)nR, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2. [0030] The term "aminocarbonyl" refers to the group -C(O)NRR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or where both R groups are joined to form a heterocyclic group (e.g., morpholino). Unless otherwise constrained by the definition, all substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF3, amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -S(O)nR, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2.
[0031] The term "ester" or "carboxyester" refers to the group -C(O)OR, where R is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl, which may be optionally further substituted by alkyl, alkoxy, halogen, CF3, amino, substituted amino, cyano, or - S(O)nRa, in which Ra is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2. [0032] The term "acylamino" refers to the group -NRC(O)R where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl. All substituents may be optionally further substituted by alkyl, alkoxy, halogen, CF3, amino, substituted amino, cyano, or -S(O)nR, in which R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2. [0033] The term "acyloxy" refers to the groups -OC(O)-alkyl, -OC(O)-cycloalkyl, - OC(O)-aryl, -OC(O)-heteroaryl, and -OC(O)-heterocyclyl. Unless otherwise constrained by the definition, all substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1 , 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF3, amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -S(O)nR, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2. [0034] The term "aryl" refers to an aromatic carbocyclic group of 6 to 20 carbon atoms having a single ring (e.g., phenyl) or multiple rings (e.g., biphenyl), or multiple condensed (fused) rings (e.g., naphthyl, fluorenyl, and anthryl). Typical aryls include phenyl, fluorenyl, naphthyl, anthryl, and the like.
[0035] Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the aryl substituent, such aryl groups can optionally be substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents (typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents), selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxy, keto, thiocarbonyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, arylthio, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, thiol, alkylthio, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonylamino, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-aryl,-SO- heteroaryl, -Sθ2-alkyl, SU2-aryl and -Sθ2-heteroaryl. Unless otherwise constrained by the definition, all substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF3, amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -S(O)nR, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2.
[0036] The term "aryloxy" refers to the group aryl-O- wherein the aryl group is as defined above, and includes optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined above. The term "arylthio" refers to the group R-S-, where R is as defined for aryl. [0037] The term "amino" refers to the group -NH2.
[0038] The term "substituted amino" refers to the group -NRR where each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclyl provided that both R groups are not hydrogen, or a group - Y-Z, in which Y is optionally substituted alkylene and Z is alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, or alkynyl. Unless otherwise constrained by the definition, all substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF3, amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -S(O)nR, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2. [0039] The term "carboxyalkyl" refers to the groups -C(O)O-alkyl, -C(O)O- cycloalkyl, where alkyl and cycloalkyl are as defined herein, and may be optionally further substituted by alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, halogen, CF3, amino, substituted amino, cyano, or -S(O)nR, in which R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2. [0040] The term "cycloalkyl" refers to cyclic alkyl groups of from 3 to 20 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings. Such cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclooctyl, and the like, or multiple ring structures such as adamantanyl, and bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, or cyclic alkyl groups to which is fused an aryl group, for example indan, and the like.
[0041] The term "substituted cycloalkyl" refers to cycloalkyl groups having 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents (typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents), selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxy, keto, thiocarbonyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, arylthio, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, thiol, alkylthio, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonylamino, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO- alkyl, -SO-aryl,-SO-heteroaryl, -Sθ2-alkyl, Sθ2-aryl and -Sθ2-heteroaryl. The term "substituted cycloalkyl" also includes cycloalkyl groups wherein one or more of the annular carbon atoms of the cycloalkyl group is a carbonyl group (i.e. an oxygen atom is oxo to the ring). Unless otherwise constrained by the definition, all substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF3, amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -S(O)nR, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2. [0042] The term "halogen" or "halo" refers to fluoro, bromo, chloro, and iodo. [0043] The term "acyl" denotes a group -C(O)R, in which R is hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, and optionally substituted heteroaryl. [0044] The term "heteroaryl" refers to a group comprising 1 to 15 carbon atoms and 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur within at least one ring. The term "heteroaryl" is generic to the terms "aromatic heteroaryl" and "partially saturated heteroaryl". The term "aromatic heteroaryl" refers to a heteroaryl in which at least one ring is aromatic. Examples of aromatic heteroaryls include pyrrole, thiophene, pyridine, quinoline, pteridine. The term "partially saturated heteroaryl" refers to a heteroaryl having a structure equivalent to an underlying aromatic heteroaryl which has had one or more double bonds in an aromatic ring of the underlying aromatic heteroaryl saturated. Examples of partially saturated heteroaryls include dihydropyrrole, dihydropyridine, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene. [0045] Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the heteroaryl substituent, such heteroaryl groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5 substituents (typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents) selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxy, keto, thiocarbonyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl (an alkyl ester), arylthio, heteroaryl, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, thiol, alkylthio, aryl, aryloxy, aralkyl, heteroaryl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonylamino, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO- alkyl, -SO-aryl,-SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, SO2-aryl and -SO2-heteroaryl. Unless otherwise constrained by the definition, all substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF3, amino, substituted amino, cyano, and - S(O)nR, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2. Such heteroaryl groups can have a single ring (e.g., pyridyl or furyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., indolizinyl, benzothiazole, or benzothienyl). Examples of nitrogen heterocyclyls and heteroaryls include, but are not limited to, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthylpyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, phenanthroline, isothiazole, phenazine, isoxazole, phenoxazine, phenothiazine, imidazolidine, imidazoline, and the like as well as N-alkoxy-nitrogen containing heteroaryl compounds.
[0046] The term "heteroaryloxy" refers to the group heteroaryl-O-. [0047] The term "heterocyclyl" refers to a monoradical saturated group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings, having from 1 to 40 carbon atoms and from 1 to 10 hetero atoms, preferably 1 to 4 heteroatoms, selected from nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, and/or oxygen within the ring.
[0048] Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the heterocyclic substituent, such heterocyclic groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5 substituents (typically 1, 2, or 3 substituents), selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxy, keto, thiocarbonyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, arylthio, heteroarylthio, heterocyclylthio, thiol, alkylthio, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonylamino, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyl, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO- alkyl, -SO-aryl,-SO-heteroaryl, -SO2-alkyl, SO2-aryl and -SO2-heteroaryl. Unless otherwise constrained by the definition, all substituents may optionally be further substituted by 1, 2, or 3 substituents chosen from alkyl, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, aminocarbonyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, halogen, CF3, amino, substituted amino, cyano, and -
S(O)nR, where R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl and n is 0, 1 or 2. Heterocyclic groups can have a single ring or multiple condensed rings. Preferred heterocyclics include tetrahydrofuranyl, morpholino, piperidinyl, and the like.
[0049] The term "thiol" refers to the group -SH.
[0050] The term "substituted alkylthio" refers to the group -S -substituted alkyl.
[0051] The term "heteroarylthiol" refers to the group -S-heteroaryl wherein the heteroaryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted heteroaryl groups as also defined above.
[0052] The term "sulfoxide" refers to a group -S(O)R, in which R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. "Substituted sulfoxide" refers to a group -S(O)R, in which R is substituted alkyl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl, as defined herein.
[0053] The term "sulfone" refers to a group -S(O)2R, in which R is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. "Substituted sulfone" refers to a group -S(O)2R, in which R is substituted alkyl, substituted aryl, or substituted heteroaryl, as defined herein.
[0054] The term "keto" refers to a group -C(O)-. The term "thiocarbonyl" refers to a group -C(S)-. The term "carboxy" refers to a group -C(O)-OH.
[0055] "Optional" or "optionally" means that the subsequently described event or circumstance may or may not occur, and that the description includes instances where said event or circumstance occurs and instances in which it does not.
[0056] A "substituted" group includes embodiments in which a monoradical substituent is bound to a single atom of the substituted group (e.g. forming a branch), and also includes embodiments in which the substituent may be a diradical bridging group bound to two adjacent atoms of the substituted group, thereby forming a fused ring on the substituted group.
[0057] A compound of a given Formula (e.g. the "compound of Formula (I)") is intended to encompass the compounds of the invention as disclosed, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, pharmaceutically acceptable esters, hydrates, polymorphs, and prodrugs of such compounds. Additionally, the compounds of the invention may possess one or more asymmetric centers, and can be produced as a racemic mixture or as individual enantiomers or diastereoisomers. The number of stereoisomers present in any given compound of a given Formula depends upon the number of asymmetric centers present (there are 2n stereoisomers possible where n is the number of asymmetric centers). The individual stereoisomers may be obtained by resolving a racemic or non-racemic mixture of an intermediate at some appropriate stage of the synthesis, or by resolution of the compound by conventional means. The individual stereoisomers (including individual enantiomers and diastereoisomers) as well as racemic and non-racemic mixtures of stereoisomers are encompassed within the scope of the present invention, all of which are intended to be depicted by the structures of this specification unless otherwise specifically indicated.
[0058] "Isomers" are different compounds that have the same molecular formula.
[0059] "Stereoisomers" are isomers that differ only in the way the atoms are arranged in space.
[0060] "Enantiomers" are a pair of stereoisomers that are non-superimposable mirror images of each other. A 1:1 mixture of a pair of enantiomers is a "racemic" mixture.
The term "(±)" is used to designate a racemic mixture where appropriate.
[0061] "Diastereoisomers" are stereoisomers that have at least two asymmetric atoms, but which are not mirror-images of each other.
[0062] The absolute stereochemistry is specified according to the Cahn Ingold Prelog
R S system. When the compound is a pure enantiomer the stereochemistry at each chiral carbon may be specified by either R or S. Resolved compounds whose absolute configuration is unknown are designated (+) or (-) depending on the direction (dextro- or laevorotary) that they rotate the plane of polarized light at the wavelength of the sodium D line.
[0063] The term "therapeutically effective amount" refers to an amount that is sufficient to effect treatment, as defined below, when administered to a mammal in need of such treatment. The therapeutically effective amount will vary depending upon the subject and disease condition being treated, the weight and age of the subject, the severity of the disease condition, the manner of administration and the like, which can readily be determined by one of ordinary skill in the art.
[0064] The term "treatment" or "treating" means any treatment of a disease in a mammal, including:
(i) preventing the disease, that is, causing the clinical symptoms of the disease not to develop;
(ii) inhibiting the disease, that is, arresting the development of clinical symptoms; and/or
(iii) relieving the disease, that is, causing the regression of clinical symptoms.
[0065] In many cases, the compounds of this invention are capable of forming acid and/or base salts by virtue of the presence of amino and/or carboxyl groups or groups similar thereto.
[0066] The term "pharmaceutically acceptable salt" of a given compound refers to salts that retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the given compound, and which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable. Pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts can be prepared from inorganic and organic bases. Salts derived from inorganic bases include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, lithium, ammonium, calcium and magnesium salts. Salts derived from organic bases include, but are not limited to, salts of primary, secondary and tertiary amines, such as alkyl amines, dialkyl amines, trialkyl amines, substituted alkyl amines, di(substituted alkyl) amines, tri(substituted alkyl) amines, alkenyl amines, dialkenyl amines, trialkenyl amines, substituted alkenyl amines, di(substituted alkenyl) amines, tri(substituted alkenyl) amines, cycloalkyl amines, di(cycloalkyl) amines, tri(cycloalkyl) amines, substituted cycloalkyl amines, disubstituted cycloalkyl amine, trisubstituted cycloalkyl amines, cycloalkenyl amines, di(cycloalkenyl) amines, tri(cycloalkenyl) amines, substituted cycloalkenyl amines, disubstituted cycloalkenyl amine, trisubstituted cycloalkenyl amines, aryl amines, diaryl amines, triaryl amines, heteroaryl amines, diheteroaryl amines, triheteroaryl amines, heterocyclic amines, diheterocyclic amines, triheterocyclic amines, mixed di- and tri-amines where at least two of the substituents on the amine are different and are selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and the like. Also included are amines where the two or three substituents, together with the amino nitrogen, form a heterocyclic or heteroaryl group.
[0067] Specific examples of suitable amines include, by way of example only, isopropylamine, trimethyl amine, diethyl amine, tri(iso-propyl) amine, tri(n-propyl) amine, ethanolamine, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, tromethamine, lysine, arginine, histidine, caffeine, procaine, hydrabamine, choline, betaine, ethylenediamine, glucosamine, N-alkylglucamines, theobromine, purines, piperazine, piperidine, morpholine, N-ethylpiperidine, and the like.
[0068] Pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts may be prepared from inorganic and organic acids. Salts derived from inorganic acids include hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like. Salts derived from organic acids include acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, oxalic acid, malic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, p-toluene-sulfonic acid, salicylic acid, and the like. [0069] As used herein, "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" includes any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents and the like. The use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active ingredient, its use in the therapeutic compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active ingredients can also be incorporated into the compositions.
[0070] "Coronary diseases" or "cardiovascular diseases" refer to diseases of the cardiovasculature arising from any one or more than one of, for example, heart failure (including congestive heart failure, diastolic heart failure and systolic heart failure), acute heart failure, ischemia, recurrent ischemia, myocardial infarction, arrhythmias, angina (including exercise-induced angina, variant angina, stable angina, unstable angina), acute coronary syndrome, diabetes, and intermittent claudication. [0071] "Intermittent claudication" means the pain associated with peripheral artery disease. "Peripheral artery disease" or PAD is a type of occlusive peripheral vascular disease (PVD). PAD affects the arteries outside the heart and brain. The most common symptom of PAD is a painful cramping in the hips, thighs, or calves when walking, climbing stairs, or exercising. The pain is called intermittent claudication. When listing the symptom intermittent claudication, it is intended to include both PAD and PVD
[0072] Arrhythmia refers to any abnormal heart rate. Bradycardia refers to abnormally slow heart rate whereas tachycardia refers to an abnormally rapid heart rate. As used herein, the treatment of arrhythmia is intended to include the treatment of supra ventricular tachycardias such as atrial fibrillation, atrial flutter, AV nodal reentrant tachycardia, atrial tachycardia, and the ventricular tachycardias (VTs), including idiopathic ventricular tachycardia, ventricular fibrillation, pre-excitation syndrome, and Torsade de Pointes (TdP),
NOMENCLATURE
[0073] Names of compounds of the present invention are provided using ChemDraw Ultra v. 10.0 (CambridgeSoft, Cambridge, MA). Other compounds or radicals may be named with common names, or systematic or non-systematic names. The naming and numbering of the compounds of the invention is illustrated with a representative compound of Formula I
Figure imgf000018_0001
which is named ethyl 5-oxo-2-propyl-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate.
[0074] Accordingly, in typical embodiments the present invention provides novel substituted heterocyclic compounds that function as late sodium channel blockers. In typical embodiments the invention relates to compounds of Formula (I):
Figure imgf000019_0001
wherein:
Ql is carbon or nitrogen,
Q2 is oxygen or Rl-N<, where Rl is hydrogen or optionally substituted lower alkyl; the double dotted line indicated by the arrow is a single bond or a double bond;
R2 is hydrogen, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or -NR21R22, where R21 and R22 are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl;
R3 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, cyano, -C(O)-R31, or -C(O)-O-R31, where R31 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl; or R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is attached form a 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or a saturated or unsaturated carbocyclic moiety, all of which are optionally substituted, for example by halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl;
R4 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl, provided that any substituent of R4 may itself be optionally substituted, for example by halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl;
R5 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -O-R51, or -NR52R53, where R51 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, where R52 and R53 are each independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or R52 and R53 taken together with the nitrogen to which they are both directly attached form 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl moiety, which is optionally substituted by halo, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl;
R6 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl, -NR61R62, where R61 and R62 are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl; or R5 and R6 taken together with the carbons to which R5 and R6 are directly attached and the carbon directly attached to both of the carbons to which R5 and R6 are directly attached form a 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or a saturated or unsaturated carbocyclic moiety, all of which are optionally substituted by halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl.
[0075] In certain embodiments R2 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or -NR21R22, where R21 and R22 are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, or optionally substituted alkynyl.
[0076] In some embodiments R2 is optionally substituted lower alkyl or -NR21R22, where R21 and R22 are independently hydrogen, optionally substituted lower alkyl, or optionally substituted alkyl. In particular embodiments R2 is amino, substituted amino, methyl, ethyl, 1 -propyl, 2-propyl, or (2-aminoethoxy)methyl.
[0077] In certain embodiments R3 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, cyano, -C(O)-R31, or -C(O)-O-R31, where R31 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted aralkyl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl.
[0078] In some embodiments, R3 is optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, cyano, - C(O)-R31, or -C(O)-O-R31, where R31 is hydrogen, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted aralkyl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl. In particular embodiments R3 is optionally substituted lower alkyl, cyano, -C(O)-R31, or -C(O)-O-R31, where R31 is optionally substituted lower alkyl, methyl, ethyl, 1 -propyl, 2-propyl, 2-methoxyethyl, benzyl, substituted benzyl, or 3,4-dimethoxybenzyl.
[0079] In certain embodiments R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is attached form a 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or an aromatic or non-aromatic carbocyclic moiety, all of which are optionally substituted by halo, cyano, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or optionally substituted heterocyclyl. In certain such embodiments R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is directly attached form a tetrazole ring; such embodiments may be represented by the Formula (II):
Formula (II)
Figure imgf000022_0001
wherein Rl, R4, R5, and R6 are as described above with relation to Formula (I).
[0080] In certain embodiments R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is directly attached form a pyrazole ring; some such embodiments may be represented by the Formula (III) or Formula (IV): Formula (III)
Figure imgf000023_0001
Formula (IV)
Figure imgf000023_0002
wherein Rl, R4, R5, and R6 are as described above with relation to Formula (I), and R23, R24 (if present), and R25 (if present) are each independently hydrogen, cyano, halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted aralkyl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or optionally substituted heterocyclyl. In particular embodiments R23, R24, and R25 are each independently methyl, ethyl, 1- propyl, 2-propyl, cyano, optionally substituted thiophenyl, optionally substituted furanyl, or optionally substituted phenyl (e.g. methylphenyl), or R23 and R24 taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted phenyl ring, an optionally substituted carbocyclic ring, or an optionally substituted heteroaryl ring.
[0081] In certain embodiments R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is directly attached form an imidazole ring; some such embodiments may be represented by the Formula (V): Formula (V)
Figure imgf000024_0001
wherein Rl, R4, R5, and R6 are as described above with relation to Formula (I), and R24 and R25 are each independently hydrogen, cyano, halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted aralkyl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or optionally substituted heterocyclyl. In particular embodiments R24 and R25 are each independently methyl, ethyl, 1 -propyl, 2-propyl, cyano, optionally substituted thiophenyl, optionally substituted furanyl, or optionally substituted phenyl (e.g. methylphenyl), or R24 and R25 taken together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted phenyl ring, an optionally substituted carbocyclic ring, or an optionally substituted heteroaryl ring.
[0082] In certain embodiments R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is directly attached form a five or six membered carbocyclic ring; some such embodiments may be represented by the Formula (VI):
Formula (VI)
Figure imgf000024_0002
wherein Q2, R4, R5, and R6 are as described above with relation to Formula (I); R24" is a covalent bond connecting the two carbons to which R24" is attached or is - CR24R24'-; R23, R24 (if present), and R25 are each independently hydrogen, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted aralkyl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or optionally substituted heterocyclyl; and R23', R24' (if present), and R25' are each independently hydrogen or optionally substituted lower alkyl. In particular embodiments, R24" is a covalent bond connecting the two carbons to which R24" is attached or is -CR24R24'-; R23, R24 (if present), and R25 are each independently hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, optionally substituted phenyl, optionally substituted thiophenyl, optionally substituted furany; and R23', R24' (if present), and R25' are each independently hydrogen, methyl, or ethyl.
[0083] In certain embodiments R4 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl. In certain embodiments R4 is aryl substituted with one or more groups selected from aryl, lower alkyl, alkyl, heteroaryl, halo, heterocyclyl, amino, and carboxyl, wherein said one or more groups are optionally substituted with alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, halo, or carboxyl. In particular embodiments R4 is optionally substituted phenyl, optionally substituted biphenyl, optionally substituted naphthalenyl, optionally substituted anthracenyl, optionally substituted thiophenyl, optionally substituted furanyl, optionally substituted benzofuranyl, optionally substituted benzothiophenyl, optionally substituted quinolinyl, optionally substituted pyrazinyl, or optionally substituted pyridinyl.
[0084] In certain embodiments R5 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -O-R51, or -NR52R53, where R51 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, where R52 and R53 are each independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or R52 and R53 taken together with the nitrogen to which they are both directly attached form 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl moiety, which is optionally substituted by halo, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl.
[0085] In particular embodiments, R5 is -O-R51, wherein R51 is optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted benzyl, optionally substituted biphenyl, optionally substituted diphenylmethyl, methyl, ethyl, 1- propyl, 2-propyl. In particular embodiments, R5 is -NR52R53, where R52 and R53 are each independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted benzyl, or R52 and R53 taken together with the nitrogen to which they are both directly attached form 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl moiety, which is optionally substituted by halo, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, aryl, or cycloalkyl (each of which may be optionally substituted).
[0086] In certain embodiments, R6 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl, -NR61R62, where R61 and R62 are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, or optionally substituted alkynyl. In particular embodiments, R6 is methyl, trifluoromethyl, ethyl, 1 -propyl, 2-propyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, 3-methoxyethyl, or (2-amino)ethoxymethyl.
[0087] In certain embodiments, R5 and R6 taken together with the carbons to which R5 and R6 are directly attached and the carbon directly attached to both of the carbons to which R5 and R6 are directly attached form a 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or a saturated or unsaturated carbocyclic moiety, all of which are optionally substituted by halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl. [0088] In particular embodiments, R5 and R6 taken together form a bridging group having the structure: -R54-R55-R56-R63-, where:
R54 is bound directly to the carbonyl carbon of Formula (I) and is -O-, -NR54'-, or -CR54'R54"-, where R54' and R54" are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, or optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted aryl.
R55 taken together with R56 is a covalent bond connecting R54 to R63, or
R55 is a covalent bond connecting R54 to R56 or is - CR55'R55"-, where R55' and R55" are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, or optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted aryl; and
R56 is -CR56'R56"- where R56' and R56" are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, or optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted aryl.
R63 is -CR63'R63" where R63' and R63" are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, or optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted aryl.
[0089] In particular embodiments, R5 and R6 taken together form a bridging group having the structure: -N(R57)(R57')-C(O)-N(R64)(R64'), where R57, R57', R64, and R64' are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, or optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted aryl.
[0090] Where a given group is described herein as being attached to a second group and the site of attachment is not explicit, the given group may be attached at any available site of the given group to any available site of the second group. For example, a "lower alkyl-substituted phenyl", where the attachment sites are not explicit, may have any available site of the lower alkyl group attached to any available site of the phenyl group. In this regard, an "available site" is a site of the group at which a hydrogen of the group may be replaced with a substituent.
[0091] In typical embodiments, the compounds provided by the present invention are effective in the treatment of conditions known to respond to administration of late sodium channel blockers, including cardiovascular diseases such as atrial and ventricular arrhythmias, Prinzmetal's (variant) angina, stable angina, unstable angina, ischemia and reperfusion injury in cardiac, kidney, liver and the brain, exercise induced angina, congestive heart disease, and myocardial infarction. In some embodiments, compounds provided by the present invention which function as late sodium channel blockers may be used in the treatment of diseases affecting the neuromuscular system resulting in pain, seizures, or paralysis, or in the treatment of diabetes and disease states related to diabetes, such as diabetic peripheral neuropathy.
[0092] Certain compounds of the invention may also possess a sufficient activity in modulating neuronal sodium channels and may have appropriate pharmacokinetic properties such that they may active with regard to the central and/or peripheral nervous system. Consequently, some compounds of the invention may also be of use in the treatment of pain of neuropathic origin.
[0093] In typical embodiments, the present invention is intended to encompass the compounds disclosed herein, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, pharmaceutically acceptable esters, tautomeric forms, polymorphs, and prodrugs of such compounds. In some embodiments, the present invention includes a pharmaceutically acceptable addition salt, a pharmaceutically acceptable ester, a hydrate of an addition salt, a tautomeric form, a polymorph, an enantiomer, a mixture of enantiomers, a stereoisomer or mixture of stereoisomers (pure or as a racemic or non-racemic mixture) of a compound described herein, e.g. a compound of Formulae (I), (II), (III), (IV), (V), (VI), further e.g. a compound listed in Table 1, below. Pharmaceutical Compositions
[0094] Compounds provided in accordance with the present invention are usually administered in the form of pharmaceutical compositions. This invention therefore provides pharmaceutical compositions that contain, as the active ingredient, one or more of the compounds described, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or ester thereof, and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients, carriers, including inert solid diluents and fillers, diluents, including sterile aqueous solution and various organic solvents, permeation enhancers, solubilizers and adjuvants. The pharmaceutical compositions may be administered alone or in combination with other therapeutic agents. Such compositions are prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art (see, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mace Publishing Co., Philadelphia, PA 17th Ed. (1985); and Modern Pharmaceutics, Marcel Dekker, Inc. 3rd Ed. (G.S. Banker & CT. Rhodes, Eds.)
[0095] The pharmaceutical compositions may be administered in either single or multiple doses by any of the accepted modes of administration of agents having similar utilities, for example as described in those patents and patent applications incorporated by reference, including rectal, buccal, intranasal and transdermal routes, by intraarterial injection, intravenously, intraperitoneally, parenterally, intramuscularly, subcutaneously, orally, topically, as an inhalant, or via an impregnated or coated device such as a stent, for example, or an artery-inserted cylindrical polymer. [0096] One mode for administration is parenteral, particularly by injection. The forms in which the novel compositions of the present invention may be incorporated for administration by injection include aqueous or oil suspensions, or emulsions, with sesame oil, corn oil, cottonseed oil, or peanut oil, as well as elixirs, mannitol, dextrose, or a sterile aqueous solution, and similar pharmaceutical vehicles. Aqueous solutions in saline are also conventionally used for injection, but less preferred in the context of the present invention. Ethanol, glycerol, propylene glycol, liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like (and suitable mixtures thereof), cyclodextrin derivatives, and vegetable oils may also be employed. The proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. The prevention of the action of microorganisms can be brought about by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like. [0097] Sterile injectable solutions are prepared by incorporating a compound according to the present invention in the required amount in the appropriate solvent with various other ingredients as enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization. Generally, dispersions are prepared by incorporating the various sterilized active ingredients into a sterile vehicle which contains the basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum-drying and freeze-drying techniques which yield a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile- filtered solution thereof.
[0098] Oral administration is another route for administration of compounds in accordance with the invention. Administration may be via capsule or enteric coated tablets, or the like. In making the pharmaceutical compositions that include at least one compound described herein, the active ingredient is usually diluted by an excipient and/or enclosed within such a carrier that can be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper or other container. When the excipient serves as a diluent, it can be in the form of a solid, semi-solid, or liquid material (as above), which acts as a vehicle, carrier or medium for the active ingredient. Thus, the compositions can be in the form of tablets, pills, powders, lozenges, sachets, cachets, elixirs, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, syrups, aerosols (as a solid or in a liquid medium), ointments containing, for example, up to 10% by weight of the active compound, soft and hard gelatin capsules, sterile injectable solutions, and sterile packaged powders.
[0099] Some examples of suitable excipients include lactose, dextrose, sucrose, sorbitol, mannitol, starches, gum acacia, calcium phosphate, alginates, tragacanth, gelatin, calcium silicate, microcrystalline cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, cellulose, sterile water, syrup, and methyl cellulose. The formulations can additionally include: lubricating agents such as talc, magnesium stearate, and mineral oil; wetting agents; emulsifying and suspending agents; preserving agents such as methyl and propylhydroxy-benzoates; sweetening agents; and flavoring agents. [0100] The compositions of the invention can be formulated so as to provide quick, sustained or delayed release of the active ingredient after administration to the patient by employing procedures known in the art. Controlled release drug delivery systems for oral administration include osmotic pump systems and dissolutional systems containing polymer-coated reservoirs or drug-polymer matrix formulations. Examples of controlled release systems are given in U.S. Patent Nos. 3,845,770; 4,326,525; 4,902514; and 5,616,345. Another formulation for use in the methods of the present invention employs transdermal delivery devices ("patches"). Such transdermal patches may be used to provide continuous or discontinuous infusion of the compounds of the present invention in controlled amounts. The construction and use of transdermal patches for the delivery of pharmaceutical agents is well known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Patent Nos. 5,023,252, 4,992,445 and 5,001,139. Such patches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of pharmaceutical agents. [0101] The compositions are preferably formulated in a unit dosage form. The term "unit dosage forms" refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient (e.g., a tablet, capsule, ampoule). The compounds are generally administered in a pharmaceutically effective amount. Preferably, for oral administration, each dosage unit contains from 1 mg to 2 g of a compound described herein, and for parenteral administration, preferably from 0.1 to 700 mg of a compound a compound described herein. It will be understood, however, that the amount of the compound actually administered usually will be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered and its relative activity, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
[0102] For preparing solid compositions such as tablets, the principal active ingredient is mixed with a pharmaceutical excipient to form a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention. When referring to these preformulation compositions as homogeneous, it is meant that the active ingredient is dispersed evenly throughout the composition so that the composition may be readily subdivided into equally effective unit dosage forms such as tablets, pills and capsules.
[0103] The tablets or pills of the present invention may be coated or otherwise compounded to provide a dosage form affording the advantage of prolonged action, or to protect from the acid conditions of the stomach. For example, the tablet or pill can comprise an inner dosage and an outer dosage component, the latter being in the form of an envelope over the former. The two components can be separated by an enteric layer that serves to resist disintegration in the stomach and permit the inner component to pass intact into the duodenum or to be delayed in release. A variety of materials can be used for such enteric layers or coatings, such materials including a number of polymeric acids and mixtures of polymeric acids with such materials as shellac, cetyl alcohol, and cellulose acetate.
[0104] Compositions for inhalation or insufflation include solutions and suspensions in pharmaceutically acceptable, aqueous or organic solvents, or mixtures thereof, and powders. The liquid or solid compositions may contain suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients as described supra. Preferably, the compositions are administered by the oral or nasal respiratory route for local or systemic effect. Compositions in preferably pharmaceutically acceptable solvents may be nebulized by use of inert gases. Nebulized solutions may be inhaled directly from the nebulizing device or the nebulizing device may be attached to a facemask tent, or intermittent positive pressure breathing machine. Solution, suspension, or powder compositions may be administered, preferably orally or nasally, from devices that deliver the formulation in an appropriate manner.
[0105] The following examples are included to demonstrate preferred embodiments of the invention. It should be appreciated by those of skill in the art that the techniques disclosed in the examples which follow represent techniques discovered by the inventor to function well in the practice of the invention, and thus can be considered to constitute preferred modes for its practice. However, those of skill in the art should, in light of the present disclosure, appreciate that many changes can be made in the specific embodiments which are disclosed and still obtain a like or similar result without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.
SYNTHETIC REACTION PARAMETERS
[0106] The terms "solvent," "inert organic solvent" or "inert solvent" refer to a solvent inert under the conditions of the reaction being described in conjunction therewith (including, for example, benzene, toluene, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran ("THF"), dimethylformamide ("DMF"), chloroform, methylene chloride (or dichloromethane), diethyl ether, methanol, pyridine and the like). Unless specified to the contrary, the solvents used in the reactions of the present invention are inert organic solvents, and the reactions are carried out under an inert gas, preferably nitrogen. [0107] The term "q.s." means adding a quantity sufficient to achieve a stated function, e.g., to bring a solution to the desired volume (i.e., 100%).
SYNTHESIS OF EXAMPLE COMPOUNDS
[0108] The compounds of the invention may be prepared using methods disclosed herein and routine modifications thereof which will be apparent given the disclosure herein and methods well known in the art. Conventional and well-known synthetic methods may be used in addition to the teachings herein. The synthesis of typical compounds described herein, e.g. compounds having structures described by one or more of Formulae (I) - (VI), may be accomplished as described in the following examples. If available, reagents may be purchased commercially, e.g. from Sigma Aldrich or other chemical suppliers.
GENERAL SYNTHESES:
[0109] Typical embodiments of compounds in accordance with the present invention may be synthesized using the general reaction schemes described below. It will be apparent given the description herein that the general schemes may be altered by substitution of the starting materials with other materials having similar structures to result in products that are correspondingly different. Descriptions of syntheses follow to provide numerous examples of how the starting materials may vary to provide corresponding products. Given a desired product for which the substituent groups (e.g. Rl, R2, R3, R4, R5 and/or R6) are defined, the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection. Starting materials are typically obtained from commercial sources or synthesized using published methods. Note that in the following examples, general syntheses may be shown using groups denoted with subscripts (e.g. Ri, R2, R3, etc.) These are distinguished from the groups described herein that do not have subscripts (e.g. Rl, R2, R3 etc.). In the syntheses generally described herein, the groups denoted with subscripts are used to describe the general form of the reaction. For synthesizing compounds which are embodiments of the present invention, inspection of the structure of the compound to be synthesized will provide the identity of each substituent group. The identity of the final product will generally render apparent the identity of the necessary starting materials by a simple process of inspection, given the examples herein.
EXAMPLE 1 Example IA: General method for synthesis of compounds of Formula (II)
Figure imgf000034_0001
(1) (2) (3) (4)
[0110] Referring to the above reaction, 5-aminotetrazole (1) is reacted with an aldehyde (2) and a beta-keto compound (3) to give the product (4), which is a compound of Formula (II). Given a desired product (4) for which the substituent groups R1, X(R2)(Rs), and R4 are defined, the necessary starting materials (2) and (3) may be determined by inspection. As used herein, a "beta-keto compound" is a compound that has a structure which includes a first carbonyl group and a second carbonyl group that is beta to the first carbonyl; the first carbonyl is typically part of an ester or amide group. In some cases of the beta-keto compound (3), X is a nitrogen and R2 and R3 may be substituents (such as are described elsewhere herein) bound to the nitrogen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto amide. In certain other cases, X taken together with R3 is an oxygen and R2 may be a substituent (such as described elsewhere herein) bound to the oxygen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto ester.
[0111] To a solution of 5-aminotetrazole (1) (10.0 mmole) and triethylamine (1.8 mmole) in hot ethanol (20 ml) was added the aldehyde (2) (10.0 mmole) followed by the beta-keto compound (3) (10.0 mmole). The mixture was heated at reflux for 15h. A precipitate was usually observed and upon cooling the mixture to room temperature, it was filtered and washed with ethanol then ethyl ether to provide the desired product as a white powder. Yields typically were in the range of between 5-90% depending upon substituents of the aldehyde (2) and the beta-keto compound (3). Example IB: Preparation of a compound of Formula (II) in which R4 is napthyl, R5 is ethoxy, and R6 is 2-propyl
[0112] Synthesis of ethyl 5-isopropyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate (PT-013):
Figure imgf000035_0001
[0113] The 5-aminotetrazole (850 mg; 10.0 mmole) is dissolved in hot ethanol (25 ml) with triethylamine (1.8 mmole; 0.25 ml). When all solids are dissolved (about ten minutes of heating at 820C), 1-naphthaldehyde ( 1.36 ml; 10.0 mmole) is added followed by ethyl isopropylacetoacetate (1.60 ml; 10.0 mmole). The clear solution is maintained at reflux for 15 h. The ethanol is removed in vacuo and the residue is dissolved in ethyl acetate. The ethyl acetate phase is added to a separatory funnel and subsequently washed with IM HCl, water, then brine. The organic phase is dried over MgSO4 and filtered. The organic phase is reduced in volume in vacuo to get an oil. A 1:1 mixture of ethyl acetate and hexanes was added to the viscous oil and stirred with a spatula to provide a precipitate. The solid was filtered to provide the product (0.70Og, 19%) as a white powder. 1H NMR ( 400 MHz; CDCl3) δ 11.0 ( bs, IH ); 7.88 ( d, IH, J = 8.2 Hz ); 7.82 ( d, IH, J = 8.2 Hz ); 7.70- 7.36 ( m, 5H ); 4.5 (m, IH); 3.92-3.80 (m, 2H); 1.55 (d, 3H, J = 6.7Hz); 1.40 (d, 3H, J = 7.0 Hz); 0.74 (at, 3H, J = 7.0 Hz). LC MS shows MH + at 364 and 2MH+ at 727.
Example 1C: Preparation of a compound of Formula (II) varying R4, R5, R6 [0114] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples IA and IB above, but replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula Ri- C(O)H and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds having the necessary substituents to result in the indicated products, the following compounds of Formula (II) were prepared: Table 1: ID
(PT-nnn) Name of Compound PT nm 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalen-l-yl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate - . - cyclopropyl(phenyl)methyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT DfH 4-phenoxybenzyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT OOA biphenyl-4-ylmethyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT C\C\<, biphenyl-2-ylmethyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 0Of, biphenyl-3-ylmethyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate - . bis(4-fluorophenyl)methyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
„„ „„„ ethyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- r 1 -UUo , , , carboxylate
PT nno ethyl 7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5-(trifluoromethyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT nm ethyl 5-ethyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate pτ ^1 1 ethyl 5-ethyl-7-(naphthalen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate _„ _ .. ,. ethyl 5-isopropyl-7-(naphthalen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT 0^ ^ ethyl 5-isopropyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate ni . 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 0^ f\ ethyl 7-(thiophen-2-yl)-5-(trifluoromethyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-
6-carboxylate _ . ethyl 7-(benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-
6-carboxylate PT m S ethyl 5-methyl-7-(3-methylbenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT m o ethyl 7-(benzofuran-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate isopropyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT 091 isopropyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate tert-butyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate tert-butyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT n9zl benzyl 5-methyl-7-(3-phenoxyphenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate pτ ~~ r benzyl 7-(biphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT OOfs benzyl 7-(biphenyl-3-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate .- benzyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate
DT- noo benzyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- r 1 -U/o , , , carboxylate
4-iodobenzyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-
6-carboxylate PT (Y*n benzyl 7-(2-methoxynaphthalen-l-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT rm benzyl 5-methyl-7-(4-methylnaphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate „, . benzyl 7-(4-(dimethylamino)naphthalen-l-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate benzyl 7-(4,6-dimethoxynaphthalen-l-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT Ω34 benzyl 7-(benzo[d][l,3]dioxol-4-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate „, _ benzyl 7-(2,3-dihydrobenzo[b][l,4]dioxin-6-yl)-5-methyl-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT Ω3fi benzyl 7-(2,3-dihydrobenzo[b][l,4]dioxin-5-yl)-5-methyl-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate „, benzyl 5-methyl-7-(quinolin-8-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate n^r mo benzyl 5-methyl-7-(quinolin-5-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- -5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6-
Figure imgf000037_0001
_„ _ . _ benzyl 5-methyl-7-(thiophen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- -T 1 -U4U Λ Λ carboxylate
PT n/i 1 benzyl 5-methyl-7-(thiophen-3-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT n/io benzyl 7-(benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-
6-carboxylate τrv Π/I Q benzyl 7-(benzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-
6-carboxylate PT n4_l benzyl 5-methyl-7-(3-methylbenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT n/i ς benzyl 7-(benzofuran-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT (VLfi 4-cyanobenzyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine -6 -carboxylate PT n47 R)-l-phenylethyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT n_lS (S)-l-phenylethyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT f)4Q (S)-((S)-l-phenylethyl) 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate „,.„ (R)-((S)-l-phenylethyl) 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ns i 4-(trifluoromethyl)benzyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
4-(trifluoromethoxy)benzyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate . _, (S)-l-phenylethyl 7-(2-methoxynaphthalen-l-yl)-5-methyl-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT nSzl (S)-l-phenylethyl 7-(4-(dimethylamino)naphthalen-l-yl)-5-methyl-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate „ „ (S)-l-phenylethyl 7-(anthracen-9-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT fiSfi (S)-l-phenylethyl 7-(benzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
(S)-l-phenylethyl 7-(benzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT f)S8 (S)-l-phenylethyl 7-(benzofuran-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT nSQ (S)-l-phenylethyl 7-(benzofuran-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT f)fi1 3,4-dimethoxybenzyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 069 2,3-dihydro-lH-inden-l-yl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT n^ 1 -phenylpropyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT nfi4 l-phenylpropan-2-yl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT Of1S 2-phenylpropan-2-yl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate . , N-benzyl-5-methyl-7-(naphthalen- 1 -yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxamide
DT- nco N-benzyl-5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- r l -UOo , • , carboxamide
PT Of1Q N'-benzoyl-5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carbohydrazide
5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-N-((S)-l-phenylethyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxamide
PT-072 9-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5,6,7,9-tetrahydrotetrazolo[5,l-b]quinazolin-8(4H)-one PT 1 Q9 εthyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT 1 Qf. benzyl 5-methyl-7-(quinolin-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate 1 Q benzyl 5-methyl-7-(quinolin-4-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate pT Λ,Λ 1 diethyl 7,7'-(l,4-phenylene)bis(5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate) - „ - diethyl 7,7'-(l,3-phenylene)bis(5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate) pτ ,^ 1 2-(4-(methoxycarbonyl)phenoxy)ethyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate _„ ^1. r 2-(6-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7- yl)phenylboronic acid pτ ,,<. , 2-(6-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7- yl)thiophen-3-ylboronic acid PT ?fif) 2,3-dihydro-lH-inden-2-yl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate . ,. 2-methoxybenzyl 7-(2,6-dimethylphenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 9fi4 2-methyl- l-phenylpropan-2-yl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6- . 3-(6-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]p3τimidin-7- yl)thiophen-2-ylboronic acid
3-cyanobenzyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
4-((lH-pyrazol-l-yl)methyl)benzyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 2RΩ 4-((lH-pyrazol-l-yl)methyl)benzyl 5-methyl-7-(thiophen-2-yl)-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
4-((lH-pyrazol-l-yl)methyl)benzyl 7-(4-(dimethylamino)naphthalen-l-yl)-5- methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 9SzI 4-((lH-pyrazol-l-yl)methyl)benzyl 7-(4-methoxynaphthalen-l-yl)-5-methyl-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
4-(lH-pyrazol-l-yl)benzyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT τ,C\C\ 4-(6-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7- yl)phenylboronic acid PT ^04 4-chloro-2-methoxybenzyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ^flfi 4-chloro-2-methoxybenzyl 7-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-methyl-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate , . 4-chloro-2-methoxybenzyl 7-(2,6-dimethylphenyl)-5-methyl-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ^nS 4-chloro-2-methoxybenzyl 7-(2-bromophenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-N'-(2-phenylacetyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-c arbohy dr azide PT ^m 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-N-phenethyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-
6-carboxamide pτ ^1 Q allyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate benzyl 5-methyl-7-(2-(4-(methylsulfonyl)piperazin-l-yl)phenyl)-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ^zIn benzyl 5-methyl-7-(2-(4-methylpiperazin-l-yl)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ^41 benzyl 5-methyl-7-(2-(4-methylpiperazin-l-yl)thiazol-5-yl)-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ^49 benzyl 5-methyl-7-(2-(piperidin-l-yl)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ^4^ benzyl 5-methyl-7-(2,4,6-trimethoxyphenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ^4S benzyl 5-methyl-7-(2-morpholinophenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT ^4f. benzyl 5-methyl-7-(2-morpholinothiazol-5-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ^47 benzyl 5-methyl-7-(2-nitro-4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate pτ _ __ benzyl 5-methyl-7-(4-(methylsulfonyl)-2-nitrophenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate _„ _ _ _ benzyl 5-methyl-7-(4-(methylsulfonyl)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate pτ _ _ , benzyl 5-methyl-7-(4-(methylthio)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-
6-carboxylate , _ benzyl 5-methyl-7-(4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate , __ benzyl 5-methyl-7-(4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ^SQ benzyl 5-methyl-7-(4-(trifluoromethylthio)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ^64 benzyl 5-methyl-7-(thiazol-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate pτ _ , _ benzyl 5-methyl-7-(thiazol-5-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate benzyl 7-(2-((R)-3-(ethoxycarbonyl)piperidin-l-yl)-4-methoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-
4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine -6 -carboxylate PT XlΔ. benzyl 7-(2-(2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ^84 benzyl 7-(2,4-bis(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
DT- αoc benzyl 7-(2,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine- methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-
Figure imgf000040_0001
a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate benzyl 7-(2-bromophenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- r l -jo / i i . carboxylate
,» _ benzyl 7-(2-cyano-4-methoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ^Q1 benzyl 7-(2-fluorophenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate benzyl 7-(2-hydroxy-6-methoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate ,_ _ benzyl 7-(2-methoxy-4-nitrophenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ^08 benzyl 7-(3,3'-bithiophen-5-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT 4fin benzyl 7-(3-bromofuran-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT Ai\Λ benzyl 7-(3-bromothiophen-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-
6-carboxylate PT 409 benzyl 7-(4-(lH-imidazol-l-yl)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine -6 -carboxylate PT 4f)S benzyl 7-(4-(2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 406 benzyl 7-(4-(2-methoxyethoxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 408 benzyl 7-(4-(dimethylamino)-2-methoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 4OQ benzyl 7-(4-(dimethylamino)-2-nitrophenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 41 n benzyl 7-(4-(dimethylamino)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 41 1 benzyl 7-(4-(methoxycarbonyl)-2-nitrophenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 419 benzyl 7-(4-(methoxycarbonyl)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 414 benzyl 7-(4,5-dimethylthiophen-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT AΛ f\ benzyl 7-(4-bromo-2-fluorophenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 417 benzyl 7-(4-cyano-2-methoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 41 8 benzyl 7-(4-cyanophenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT 41 Q benzyl 7-(4-methoxy-2-nitrophenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 491 benzyl 7-(4-methoxynaphthalen-l-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 422 benzyl 7-(9-ethyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 49*3 bis(4-fluorophenyl)methyl 5-methyl-7-(thiophen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 426 cyclopropylmethyl 7-(2-bromobenzo[b]thiophen-3-yl)-5-methyl-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate ethyl 5-methyl-7-(2-(2-methyl-lH-imidazol-l-yl)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate hydrochloride PT 4SS ethyl 5-methyl-7-(2-(4-sulfamoylphenoxy)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 4SQ ethyl 5-methyl-7-(2-(pyridin-3-yl)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-
6-carboxylate PT 460 ethyl 5-methyl-7-(2-(pyridin-4-yl)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-
6-carboxylate PT 461 ethyl 5-methyl-7-(2-(pyrimidin-5-yl)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 462 ethyl 5-methyl-7-(2-(thiophen-2-yl)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-
6-carboxylate PT 464 ethyl 5-methyl-7-(3-phenoxyphenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate ethyl 7-(2-(lH-l,2,4-triazol-l-yl)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate ethyl 7-(2-(lH-imidazol-l-yl)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate hydrochloride . ethyl 7-(2-(lH-pyrazol-l-yl)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine -6 -carboxylate hydrochloride PT 484 ethyl 7-(2-(4-(ethoxycarbonyl)piperidin-l-yl)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 48S ethyl 7-(2-(4-cyanophenoxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 486 ethyl 7-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT 487 ethyl 7-(2,6-dimethylphenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT 4RQ ethyl 7-(2-bromobenzo[b]thiophen-3-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 4Q2 ethyl 7-(2-iodophenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT 4QS ethyl 7-(3-bromothiophen-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate _„ ^Λ 1 ethyl 7-(4-(dimethylamino)-2-nitrophenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT SfU ethyl 7-(4-methoxynaphthalen-l-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT S06 isopropyl 7-(2-bromobenzo[b]thiophen-3-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate pT ^1 ,, methyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate pτ _. » methyl 5-methyl-7-(thiophen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate
PT-514 methyl 5-methyl-7-phenyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate pT _1 7 methyl 7-(2-bromo-5-chlorobenzo[b]thiophen-3-yl)-5-methyl-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT S1 8 methyl 7-(2-bromobenzo[b]thiophen-3-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate pτ _. Q methyl 7-(2-iodophenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate _.. methyl 7-(3-bromobenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate pτ _,, . methyl 7-(5-(4-methoxyphenyl)thiophen-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate pT _„ methyl 7-(5-bromothiophen-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-
6-carboxylate pT _„ _ thiophen-2-ylmethyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
[0115] Given a desired product, such as for example set out in the above table, the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example IA.
Example ID: Preparation of a compound of Formula (II) varying R4, R5, R6 [0116] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples IA and IB above, but optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula Ri-C(O)H and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds, further compounds of Formula (II) may be prepared.
EXAMPLE 2
Example 2A: Preparation of materials
[0117] Beta-keto compounds (such as the beta-keto compound (3) in Example 1) used in the synthesis of compounds of the invention typically are either purchased commercially or may be synthesized using known methods. An example of one synthesis is described here: [0118] Synthesis of benzyl 3-oxybutanoate:
Figure imgf000043_0001
diketene benzyl alcohol 1 8h benzyl 3-oxobutanoate
[0119] To a solution of benzyl alcohol (50 mmoles) in dry THF (100 ml) cooled to 0° C was added diketene (50 mmoles) followed by DMAP (2.5 mmoles). The reddish solution is allowed to warm to room temperature in the ice bath over 18h. The reaction solution is then reduced in vacuo, and ethyl acetate (300 ml) is then added. The organic phase is washed with sodium bicarbonate solution, water, IM HCl solution, then brine. The organic phase is decanted and reduced in vacuo to provide the beta-ketoester typically as a pinkish oil.
[0120] It is noted that various different beta-keto compound products may be obtained by essentially following the procedure set out in this Example above, but optionally replacing the benzyl alcohol with another alcohol (e.g. having the general structure HO- R', where R' may be, e.g. optionally substituted alkyl) or with an amine (e.g. having the general structure H-NR' R", wherein R' and R" may be, e.g. independently hydrogen or optionally substituted alkyl, or R' and R" taken together with the nitrogen may form a heterocyclic ring). If another alcohol is used, the product will be a beta- ketoester; and if an amine is used, the product will be a beta-ketoamide. For example, the benzyl alcohol may be replaced with 4-chlorobenzyl amine, in which case the product of the above reaction is 4-chlorobenzyl 3-oxobutanoate. When preparing beta- ketoamides, DMAP is not necessary and the products are typically solids. [0121] Another example of a synthesis of a beta-keto compound in which the beta-keto compound is a beta-keto hydrazide is given here:
Figure imgf000043_0002
[0122] The synthesis for this reaction essentially follows the procedure for synthesis of beta-keto amides as described earlier in this Example, but with the replacement of the amine by the hydrazide. The R' group may be, e.g. optionally substituted lower alkyl, benzyl, phenylethyl, or other substituent group. In the examples herein, Similarly, still other beta-keto compounds (such as the beta-keto compound (3) in Example 1) may be obtained by essentially following the procedure set out in this Example above, but replacing the starting materials with other alcohol, amine, or hydrazide starting materials.
Example 2B: Preparation of materials
[0123] Aldehyde compounds (such as the aldehyde (2) in Example 1) used in the synthesis of compounds of the invention typically are either purchased commercially or may be synthesized using known methods. An example of one synthesis is described here:
[0124] Synthesis of 2-(benzyloxy)benzaldehyde:
Figure imgf000044_0001
Figure imgf000044_0002
2-(benzyloxy)benzaldehyde
[0125] Salicylaldehyde (50 mmoles) was dissolved in dry dimethylformamide (DMF) (100 ml) at room temperature. Benzyl bromide (75 mmoles) was then added followed by the potassium carbonate (125 mmoles) and the mixture stirred at room temperature for 48h. The mixture is then filtered to remove the potassium carbonate and the filtrate is mixed with ethyl acetate. The organic phase is washed with water (3 x 200 ml), brine and dried over MgSO4. The solution is then filtered and evaporated in vacuo to provide the crude material. Solid products are washed with ethyl ether to provide the clean desired product or in the case of aldehydes which are oils, they are purified by silica gel chromatography.
[0126] It is noted that various different product aldehydes may be obtained by essentially following the procedure set out in this Example above, but optionally replacing the salicylaldehyde with a substituted salicylaldehyde and/or optionally replacing the benzyl bromide with a substituted benzyl bromide. For example, the benzylbromide may be replaced with ethyl 4-(bromomethyl)benzoate, in which case the product of the above reaction is ethyl 4-((2-formylphenoxy)methyl)benzoate. As another example, the salicylaldehyde may be replaced with 5-bromo-2- hydroxybenzaldehyde or 2-hydroxy-4-methoxybenzaldehyde, in which case the product of the above reaction is 2-(benzyloxy)-5-bromobenzaldehyde or 2-(benzyloxy)-4- methoxybenzaldehyde, respectively. Similarly, still other aldehyde products (e.g. compounds of the general formula Ri-C(O)H) may be obtained by essentially following the procedure set out in this Example above, but replacing the starting materials with other substituted starting materials.
EXAMPLE 3
Preparation of a compound of Formula (II) varying R4, R5, R6 [0127] The variations in the beta-keto compounds and aldehydes described in Examples 2A and 2B, respectively, may be used in the synthesis of compounds of Formula (II) as described in Example 1. By essentially following the procedures set out in Example 1 above, but replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula R1-C(O)H (such as described in Example 2B) and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds (such as described in Example 2B) having the necessary substituents to result in the indicated products, the following compounds of Formula (II) were prepared:
Table 2:
ID (PT-nnn) Name of Compound
. ,_ 3-((2-(6-(ethoxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dmydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7- yl)phenoxy)methyl)benzoic acid . ,_ 3-((3-(6-(ethoxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dmydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7- yl)phenoxy)methyl)benzoic acid - _ - 4-((lH-pyrazol-l-yl)methyl)benzyl 7-(2-(benzyloxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo [ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
- _ _ 4-((2-(6-(ethoxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dmydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7- yl)phenoxy)methyl)benzoic acid
4-((3-(6-(ethoxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dmydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7- yl)phenoxy)methyl)benzoic acid - _ - 4-(2-(5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dmydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carbonyloxy)ethoxy)benzoic acid
PT 9QQ 4-(6-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7-yl)benzoic acid benzyl 7-(2-(4-(ethoxycarbonyl)benzyloxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ^Sn benzyl 7-(2-(benzyloxy)-4-methoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
PT ^81 benzyl 7-(2-(benzyloxy)-5-bromophenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
PT-382 benzyl 7-(2-(benzyloxy)-6-methoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
DT αoα benzyl 7-(2-(benzyloxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dmydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- r l -joj car ,boxy ,lat ,e
PT 480 etnyl 7-(2-(3-(methoxycarbonyl)benzyloxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ARI ethyl 7-(2-(4-(ethoxycarbonyl)benzyloxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 4QS ethyl 7-(3-(3-(methoxycarbonyl)benzyloxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 407 etnyl 7-(3-(4-(ethoxycarbonyl)benzyloxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate pT ^1 y- methyl 7-(2-(4-(ethoxycarbonyl)benzyloxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
EXAMPLE 4 Example 4A: General method for synthesis of compounds of Formula (III)
Figure imgf000046_0001
(5) (2) (3) (6)
[0128] Referring to the above reaction, the aminopyrazole (5) is reacted with an aldehyde (2) and a beta-keto compound (3) to give the product (6), which is a compound of Formula (III). Given a desired product (6) for which the substituent groups Ri, X(R2)(R3), R4, R5 and R6 are defined, the necessary starting materials (2), (3) and (5) may be determined by inspection. In certain cases, X is a nitrogen and R2 and R3 may be substituents (such as are described elsewhere herein) bound to the nitrogen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto amide. In certain other cases, X taken together with R3 is an oxygen and R2 may be a substituent (such as described elsewhere herein) bound to the oxygen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto ester.
[0129] To a solution of the aminopyrazole (5) (10.0 mmole) and triethylamine (1.8 mmole) in hot ethanol (15 ml) was added the aldehyde (2) (10.0 mmole) followed by the beta-keto compound (3) (10.0 mmole). The solution was maintained at reflux for 15h. In cases in which a precipitate formed, the mixture was cooled to room temperature, and the mixture was filtered and washed with ethanol and ethyl ether to provide the desired product (6). In cases in which no precipitate formed in the flask, the mixture was cooled to room temperature and the ethanol stripped in vacuo, and the crude viscous material was purified on a 150g Siθ2 flash column using 30% ethyl acetate: hexanes as eluent. The purified material was washed with a 1:1 mixture of ethyl ether and hexanes in a filter funnel to provide the desired product (6).
Example 4B: Preparation of a compound of Formula (III) in which R4 is napthyl, R5 is ethoxy, and R6 is methyl
[0130] Synthesis of ethyl 3-cyano-5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7- dihydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate (PT-091):
Figure imgf000047_0001
PT-091
[0131] To a solution of 2-amino-3-cyano-lH-pyrazole (1.08 g, 10.0 mmole) and triethylamine (0.25 ml, 1.8 mmole) in hot ethanol (15 ml) was added 1-naphthaldehyde (1.36 ml, 10.0 mmole) followed by ethylacetoacetate (1.28 ml, 10.0 mmole). The solution was maintained at reflux for 15h. No precipitate had formed in the flask. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and the ethanol stripped in vacuo. The crude viscous material was purified on a 150g Siθ2 flash column using 30% ethyl acetate: hexanes as eluent. The purified material was washed with a 1:1 mixture of ethyl ether and hexanes in a filter funnel to provide the desired product (0.422 mg, 12%) as a white powder. 1H NMR ( 400 MHz; DMSO-d6) δ 10.90 ( bs, IH ); 8.6 (d, IH, J = 8.6 Hz); 7.94 (d,lH, J = 8.2 Hz); 7.86 (d, IH, J = 7.4 Hz); 7.72 (s, IH); 7.64 (at, IH, J = 7.0 Hz); 7.56 (at, IH, J = 7.4 Hz); 7.46 (at, IH, J = 7.4 Hz); 7.4 (bd, IH, J = 6.3 Hz); 3.76 (q, 2H, J = 7.0 Hz); 2.54 (s, 3H); 0.67 (t, 3H, J = 7.0 Hz). LC MS shows MH + at 359; M+Na at 381 and 2M+Na at 739.
Example 4C: Preparation of a compound of Formula (III) varying R4 and R5 [0132] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 4A and 4B above, but optionally replacing the aminopyrazole (5) with other aminopyrazoles having the general structure (5) set out in Example 4A, and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula R1-C(O)H, and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds (e.g. acetoacetate or acetoacetamide) having the necessary substituents to result in the indicated products, the following compounds of Formula (III) were prepared:
Table 3:
ID (PT-nnn) Name of Compound ethyl 3-cyano-5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- PT-091 carboxylate
(S)-l-phenylethyl 5-methyl-7-(3-methylbenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)-4,7- PT- 244 dihydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
6-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-7-(4-(dimethylamino)naphthalen-l-yl)-5-methyl-4,7- PT-311 dihydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-3-carboxylic acid
6-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-7-(4-methoxynaphthalen-l-yl)-5-methyl-4,7- PT-312 dihydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-3-carboxylic acid benzyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-3-phenyl-4,7-dihydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine- PT-362 6-carboxylate
PT-363 benzyl 5-methyl-7-(thiazol-2-yl)-4,7-dihydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate benzyl 7-(2-methoxy-4-nitrophenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- PT-394 carboxylate ethyl 5-methyl-7-(3-phenoxyphenyl)-4,7-dihydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- PT-463 carboxylate ethyl 7-(2-(2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydropyrazolo[l,5- PT-478 a]pyrimidine -6-carboxylate ethyl 7-(2-bromobenzo[b]thiophen-3-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydropyrazolo[l,5- PT-488 a]pyrimidine -6-carboxylate ethyl 7-(2-cyano-4-methoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- PT-491 carboxylate ethyl 7-(4-(dimethylamino)naphthalen-l-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydropyrazolo[l,5- PT-502 a]pyrimidine -6-carboxylate methyl 2,5-dimethyl-7-(4-methylthiazol-2-yl)-4,7-dihydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- PT-507 carboxylate methyl 2,5-dimethyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- PT-508 carboxylate methyl 5-methyl-7-(4-methylthiazol-2-yl)-4,7-dihydropyrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- PT-511 carboxylate
[0133] Given a desired product, such as for example set out in the above table, the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example 4A.
Example 4D: Preparation of a compound of Formula (III) varying R4 and R5 [0134] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 4A and 4B above, but optionally replacing the aminopyrazole (5) with other aminopyrazoles having the general structure (5) set out in Example 4A, and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula Ri-C(O)H and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds, further compounds of Formula (III) may be prepared.
EXAMPLE 5 Example 5A: General method for synthesis of compounds of Formula (IV)
Figure imgf000049_0001
(7) (2) (3) (8)
[0135] Referring to the above reaction, the aminopyrazole (7) is reacted with an aldehyde (2) and a beta-keto compound (3) to give the product (8), which is a compound of Formula (IV). Given a desired product (8) for which the substituent groups Ri, X(R2)(R3), R4, R5 and R6 are defined, the necessary starting materials (2), (3) and (7) may be determined by inspection. In certain cases, X is a nitrogen and R2 and R3 may be substituents (such as are described elsewhere herein) bound to the nitrogen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto amide. In certain other cases, X taken together with R3 is an oxygen and R2 may be a substituent (such as described elsewhere herein) bound to the oxygen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto ester.
[0136] To a solution of the amino-substituted pyrazole (7) (10.0 mmole) and triethylamine (1.8 mmole) in hot ethanol (20 ml) was added the aldehyde (2) (10.0 mmole) followed by the beta-keto compound (3) (e.g. acetoacetate or acetoacetamide) (10.0 mmole). The mixture was heated at reflux for 15h. A precipitate is usually observed and upon cooling the mixture to room temperature, it is filtered and washed with ethanol then ethyl ether to provide the desired product as a white powder. Yields can vary between 5-90% depending upon substituents of the aldehyde (2) and the beta- keto compound (3). Example 5B: Preparation of a compound of Formula (IV) in which R4 is A- methylthiazol-2-yl, R5 is methoxy, and R6 is methyl
Figure imgf000050_0001
PT-509 PT-507
[0137] Procedure: To a mixture of 3-methyl-lH-pyrazol-5-amine (527 mg, 5.42 mmol) and absolute ethanol (EtOH) (8 ml) and DMF (2 mL) was added compound A- methylthiazole-2-carbaldehyde (690 mg, 5.42 mmol), and then methyl acetoacetate (756 mg, 6.51 mmol). The whole mixture was heated to reflux. In 18 h, the mixture was cooled to room temperature and concentrated to give an orange slurry. LCMS showed only 2 isomers with the same mz in MS at a ratio of 1.1 : 1.0 (PT-509 : PT507). DMF (3 mL) was added, the reaction mixture was subjected to preparative HPLC with a gradient of MeCN/H20 (5% to 98%) to afford PT-509 (710 mg, 2.33 mmol, 43%). MS mz 305.1 (M+H), HPLC 92% pure. 1H NMR (400 MHz; DMSO-D6) 6.91 (s, IH); 5.39 (s, IH ); 3.57 (s, IH); 3.50 (s, IH); 3.47 (s, 3H); 2.39 (s, 3H); 2.28 (s, 3H); 2.20 (s, 3H).
[0138] The reaction also afforded PT-507 (544 mg, 1.79 mmol, 33%). MS mz 305.1 (M+H), HPLC >98%. 1H NMR (400 MHz; DMSO-D6) 7.13 (s, IH); 6.38 (s, IH ); 5.50 (s, IH); 3.56 (s, 3H); 2.40 (s, 3H); 2.84 (s, 3H); 2.07 (s, 3H).
Example 5C: Preparation of compounds of Formula (IV) in which R4 is naphthyl and
R5 and R6 together form a bridging group
[0139] In a variation of the synthesis described in Examples 5A and 5B, the beta-keto compound is a cyclic compound, such as a cyclic amide or cyclic ester. The final product is a compound of Formula (IV) in which R5 and R6 taken together form a bridging group, such as -0-CH2- (as shown below). The synthesis of one such compound is described here.
[0140] Synthesis of p-toluyl-7,8-dihydro-lH-furo[3,4-e]pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridin-5(4H)- one (PT-078):
Figure imgf000051_0001
PT-O 78
[0141] To a solution of lH-2-amino-4-toluylpyrazole (866mg, 5.0 mmole) in ethanol (15ml) at 82°C was added triethylamine (0.2 ml, 1.4 mmole) followed by 1- naphthaldehyde (0.682 ml, 5.0 mmole) and then tetronic acid (0.50 g, 5.0 mmole). The clear solution mixture was maintained at reflux for 15h. A precipitate had formed and the mixture was cooled to room temperature. The mixture was filtered and washed with ethanol and ethyl ether to provide the desired product ( 0.554 g, 28%) as a light yellow powder, powder. 1H NMR ( 400 MHz; DMSO-d6) δ 12.5 ( bs, IH ); 10.4 (bs, IH); 7.82 (d,lH, J = 9.3 Hz); 7.65 (d, IH, J = 9.0 Hz); 7.55-7.40 (bs, m, 2H); 7.32 (at, IH, J = 7.4 Hz); 7.20-7.15 ( m, 3H); 6.95-6.80 bs, m, 2H); 6.0 (bs, IH); 4.86 (s, 2H); 2.11 ( s, 3H). LC MS shows MH + at 394 and 2MH+ at 787.
Example 5D: Preparation of a compound of Formula (IV) varying R4 and R5 [0142] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 5A, 5B and 5C above, but optionally replacing the aminopyrazole (7) with other aminopyrazoles having the general structure (7) set out in Example 5A, and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula Ri- C(O)H, and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds (e.g. acetoacetate or acetoacetamide or cyclic amide or cyclic ester) having the necessary substituents to result in the indicated products, the following compounds of Formula (IV) were prepared:
Table 4:
ID (PT-nnn) Name of Compound
. , ethyl 6-memyl-4-(naphmalen-l-yl)-3-p-tolyl-4,7-dmydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-
5-carboxylate
PT 074 emyl 3,6-dimethyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5- carboxylate ethyl 6-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5- carboxylate . , benzyl 6-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-3-(thiophen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4- b]pyridine-5-carboxylate benzyl 6-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-3-p-tolyl-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine- 5-carboxylate
PT-078 p-tolyl-7,8-dihydro-lH-furo[3,4-e]pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridin-5(4H)-one PT-079 H-furo[3,4-e]pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridin-5(4H)-one
_„ nor. 3-(furan-2-yl)-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-7,8-dihydro-lH-furo[3,4-e]pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridin- 5 (4H) -one
„„ no Λ 3-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-7,8-dihydro-lH-furo[3,4-e]pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridin-5(4H)- Y 1 -Uo l one
4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-l-phenyl-7,8-dihydro-lH-furo[3,4-e]pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridin-5(4H)- one
PT OS^ 3-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-l-phenyl-7,8-dihydro-lH-furo[3,4-e]pyrazolo[3,4- Ubj b]pyridin-5(4H)-one
PT-084 4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-7,8-dihydro-lH-furo[3,4-e]pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridin-5(4H)-one pT ns _ methyl 4-(4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5-oxo-4,5,7,8-tetrahydro-lH-furo[3,4-b]pyrazolo[4,3- e]pyridin-3-yl)benzoate . ,, 2-methyl-l-phenylpropan-2-yl 4-(2-bromophenyl)-6-methyl-4,7-dihydro-lH- pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5-carboxylate
PT-301 4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-lH-furo[3,4-e]pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridin-5(7H)-one
PT-302 4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-l-phenyl-lH-furo[3,4-e]pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridin-5(7H)-one pτ γ. - benzyl 3,6-dimethyl-4-(naphthalen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5- carboxylate ,- benzyl 4-(2-((R)-3-(ethoxycarbonyl)piperidin-l-yl)-4-methoxyphenyl)-6-methyl-4,7- dihydro- 1 H-pyrazolo [3 ,4-b]pyridine-5 -carboxylate benzyl 4-(2-bromophenyl)-6-methyl-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5- carboxylate benzyl 4-(4-(dimethylamino)naphthalen-l-yl)-6-methyl-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4- b]pyridine-5-carboxylate ,,, benzyl 4-(4-methoxynaphthalen-l-yl)-6-methyl-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4- b]pyridine-5-carboxylate benzyl 6-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5- carboxylate
„„ , ,„ benzyl 6-methyl-4-(naphthalen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5- r l -joo , , . carboxylate
PT-369 benzyl 6-methyl-4-(thiazol-2-yl)-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5-carboxylate , . benzyl 6-methyl-4-(thiophen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5- carboxylate
PT-372 benzyl 6-methyl-4-phenyl-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5-carboxylate PT /i /in ethyl l,3,6-trimethyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5- carboxylate PT zLzn ethyl 3,6-dimethyl-4-(thiophen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5- carboxylate PT zUS ethyl 4-(2-(benzyloxy)-4-methoxyphenyl)-6-methyl-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4- b]pyridine-5-carboxylate PT AAf, ethyl 4-(2,6-dimethoxyphenyl)-6-methyl-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5- carboxylate PT 447 ethyl 4-(2-bromobenzo[b]thiophen-3-yl)-6-methyl-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4- b]pyridine-5-carboxylate PT /i /i δ ethyl 4-(2-bromophenyl)-6-methyl-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5- carboxylate PT-454 ethyl 4-(4-(dimethylamino)naphthalen-l-yl)-6-methyl-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4- b]pyridine-5-carboxylate
PT 470 ethyl 6-memyl-4-(3-phenoxyphenyl)-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5- carboxylate
PT-473 ethyl o-methyl^-Cthiophen^-y^^J-dihydro-lH-pyrazolofS^-bJpyridine-S-carboxylate PT Sf)Q methyl 3,6-dimethyl-4-(4-methylthiazol-2-yl)-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-
5-carboxylate pT .. „ methyl 4-(2,4-dichlorothiazol-5-yl)-6-methyl-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-
5-carboxylate pτ ^1 _ methyl 6-methyl-4-(4-methylthiazol-2-yl)-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5- carboxylate
S)-l-phenylethyl 6-methyl-4-(3-methylbenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydro-lH- pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5-carboxylate
[0143] Given a desired product, such as for example set out in the above table, the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example 5 A.
Example 5E: Preparation of a compound of Formula (IV) varying R4, R5, R6 [0144] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 5A, 5B and 5C above, but optionally replacing the aminopyrazole (7) with other aminopyrazoles having the general structure (7) set out in Example 5A, and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula R1- C(O)H and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds (e.g. acetoacetate or acetoacetamide or cyclic amide or cyclic ester), further compounds of Formula (IV) may be prepared.
EXAMPLE 6 Example 6A: General method for synthesis of compounds of Formula (V)
Figure imgf000053_0001
(9) (2) (3) (10)
[0145] Referring to the above reaction, the 2-aminoimidazole (9) is reacted with an aldehyde (2) and a beta-keto compound (3) to give the product (10), which is a compound of Formula (V). Given a desired product (10) for which the substituent groups Ri, X(R2)(R3), R4, R5 and R6 are defined, the necessary starting materials (2), (3) and (9) may be determined by inspection. In certain cases, X is a nitrogen and R2 and R3 may be substituents (such as are described elsewhere herein) bound to the nitrogen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto amide. In certain other cases, X taken together with R3 is an oxygen and R2 may be a substituent (such as described elsewhere herein) bound to the oxygen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto ester.
[0146] To a solution of 2-aminoimidazole (10.0 mmole) and triethylamine (10.0 mmole) in hot ethanol (20 ml) was added the aldehyde (2) (10.0 mmole) followed by the beta-keto compound (10.0 mmole). The solution was maintained at reflux for 15h. A white precipitate is usually observed in the flask. The mixture was cooled to room temperature, filtered and washed consecutively with ethanol, ethyl acetate then ethyl ether to provide the desired product (10) as a white powder.
Example 6B: Preparation of a compound of Formula (V) in which R4 is napthyl, R5 is benzyloxy, and R6 is methyl
Synthesis of benzyl 7-methyl-5-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5,8-dihydroimidazo[l, 2- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate (PT-088):
Figure imgf000054_0001
PT-088
[0147] To a solution of 2-aminoimidazole- 1/2 H2SO4 (1.32 g, 10.0 mmole) and triethylamine (1.4 ml, 10.0 mmole) in hot ethanol (20 ml) was added 1-naphthaldehyde (1.36 ml, 10.0 mmole) followed by benzylacetoacetate (1.72 ml, 10.0 mmole). The solution is maintained at reflux for 15h. A white precipitate had formed in the flask. The mixture was cooled to room temperature, filtered and washed consecutively with ethanol, ethyl acetate then ethyl ether to provide the desired product (0.883 g, 22%) as a white powder. 1H NMR ( 400 MHz; CDCl3) δ 8.32 ( bs, IH ); 7.88 (m, IH); 7.76 (d,lH, J = 7.8 Hz); 7.54 (d, IH, J = 7.0 Hz); 7.48 (m, 2H); 7.37 (at, IH, J = 7.8 Hz); 7.13 (m, 2H); 7.04 (at, IH, J = 7.8 Hz); 6.7 (ad, 2H, J = 7.0 Hz); 6.63 (d, IH, J = 1.5 Hz); 6.43 (d, IH, J = Ll Hz). LC MS shows MH + at 396.
Example 6C: Preparation of a compound of Formula (V) varying R4 and R5 [0148] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 6A and 6B above, but optionally replacing the 2-aminoimidazole (9) with other 2- aminoimidazoles having the general structure (9) set out in Example 6A, and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula Ri- C(O)H, and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds (e.g. acetoacetate or acetoacetamide) having the necessary substituents to result in the indicated products, the following compounds of Formula (V) were prepared:
Table 5: ID
(PT-nnn) Name of Compound „„ no , ethyl 7-memyl-5-(naphmalen-2-yl)-5,8-dihydroimidazo[l,2-a]pyrimidine-6- .
Figure imgf000055_0001
e no ethyl 7-memyl-5-(naphmalen-l-yl)-5,8-dihydroimidazo[l,2-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate
„„ noo benzyl 7-methyl-5-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5,8-dihydroimidazo[l,2-a]pyrimidine-6- r l-Uoo car ,boxy ,lat ,e
PT 1 QzI emyl 2,3-dicyano-7-methyl-5-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5,8-dihydroimidazo[l,2- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
[0149] Given a desired product, such as for example set out in the above table, the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example 6A.
Example 6D: Preparation of a compound of Formula (V) varying R4 and R5 [0150] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 6A and 6B above, but optionally replacing the 2-aminoimidazole (9) with other 2- aminoimidazoles having the general structure (9) set out in Example 6A, and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula Ri- C(O)H and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds, further compounds of Formula (V) may be prepared. EXAMPLE 7
Example 7A: General method for synthesis of compounds of Formula (VI)
Figure imgf000056_0001
(11) (2) (3) (12)
[0151] Referring to the above reaction, the 1,3-cyclohexanedione (11) is reacted with an aldehyde (2) and a beta-keto compound (3) to give the product (12), which is a compound of Formula (VI). Given a desired product (12) for which the substituent groups R1, X(R2)(Rs), R4, R51, R52, Rόi, Rό2, R71, R72, are defined, the necessary starting materials (2), (3) and (11) may be determined by inspection. In certain cases, X is a nitrogen and R2 and R3 may be substituents (such as are described elsewhere herein) bound to the nitrogen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto amide. In certain other cases, X taken together with R3 is an oxygen and R2 may be a substituent (such as described elsewhere herein) bound to the oxygen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto ester.
[0152] To a solution of the 1,3-cyclohexanedione (11) (10.0 mmole) in hot ethanol (20ml) was added the aldehyde (2) (10.0 mmole) then the beta-keto compound (3) (10.0 mmole) (e.g. beta-keto ester or beta-keto amide) followed by the ammonium acetate (20.0 mmole). The mixture is heated at reflux for 15h and then reduced in vacuo. The mixture is taken up in ethyl acetate and washed with water (2X), saturated aqueous NaHCU3 then brine. The organic phase is dried over MgSO4, filtered then reduced in vacuo. The material is either taken up in ethyl acetate or ethyl ether and crystallization is initiated with scratching or letting the solution sit overnight at room temperature. If the above procedure does not work, the material is purified on a silica gel flash column to provide the purified desired product.
[0153] It is noted that essentially the same reaction may be performed, but substituting a 1,3-cyclopentanedione (13) and ending with the product (14), as shown here:
Figure imgf000057_0001
(13) (2) (3) (14)
[0154] Thus, compounds of the invention having the structure given by Formula (VI) wherein R24" is a bond may be synthesized as described in this example.
Example 7B: Preparation of a compound of Formula (VI) in which R4 is 5- phenylthiophen-2-yl, R5 is ethoxy, and R6 is propyl
[0155] Synthesis of ethyl 7,7-dimethyl-5-oxo-4-(5-phenylthiophen-2-yl)-2-propyl- 1,4,5, 6,7, 8-hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate (PT-141):
Figure imgf000057_0002
PT-141
[0156] To a solution of dimedone (0.7Og, 5.0 mmole) in hot ethanol (15 ml) was added 5-phenyl-2-thiophenecarboxaldehyde (0.940 g, 5.0 mmole), ethyl propylacetoacetate (0.80 ml, 5.0 mmole) and lastly ammonium acetate (0.77Og, 10.0 mmole). The mixture was held at reflux for 48h. No precipitate was observed. The ethanol was removed in vacuo to provide a crude viscous material which was subjected to a lOOg SiC^ flash column using 40% ethyl acetate: hexanes as eluent. The desired product (1.54g, 68%) was obtained as a yellow amorphous solid. Rf = 0.37 in 1:1 ethyl acetate : hexanes. 1H NMR ( 400 MHz; CDCl3) δ 7.5 (bd, 2H, J = 7.0 Hz); 7.32-7.25 (m, 2H); 7.19 (at,lH, J = 7.4 Hz); 7.04 (d, IH, J = 7.4 Hz); 6.8 (d, IH, J = 3.5 Hz); 6.38 (bs, IH); 5.41 (s, IH); 4.22-3.90 (m, 2H); 2.90-2.80 (m, IH); 2.72-2.63 (m, IH); 2.35 (d, IH, J = 16.8 Hz); 2.25 (d, IH, J = 16.8 Hz); 2.3-2.2 (m, 2H); 1.74-1.62 (m, 2H); 1.25 (at, 3H, J = 7.0 Hz); 1.07 (s, 3H); 1.02 (s, 3H); 1.01 (at, 3H, J = 7.0 Hz); 1.05-0.95 (m, 2H). LC MS shows MH + at 450; 2M +H at 899 and 2M+Na at 921. Example 7C: Preparation of a compound of Formula (VI) varying R4, R5, R6, R24" [0157] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 7A and 7B above, but optionally replacing the 1,3-cyclohexanedione (11) with another 1,3- cyclohexanedione having the general structure (11) set out in Example 7A (or replacing it with a 1,3-cyclopentanedione having the general structure (13), as explained at the end of Example 7A), and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula R1-C(O)H, and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds (e.g. acetoacetate or acetoacetamide) having the necessary substituents to result in the indicated products, the following compounds of Formula (VI) were prepared:
Table 6: ID
(PT-nnn) Name of Compound pτ ^ 1 ethyl 4-(biphenyl-4-yl)-2,7,7-trimemyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinolirie-3- carboxylate pτ . »- 3-(3-(emoxycarbonyl)-2,7,7-trimemyl-5-oxo-l, 4,5,6,7, 8-hexahydroqumolin-4- yl)benzoic acid PT i α/i emyl 4-(2-methoxynaphthalen-l-yl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate ^^ ethyl 2-methyl-4-(4-methylnaphthalen-l-yl)-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate PT T3£ emyl 2-ethyl-4-(4-methoxynaphthalen-l-yl)-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate _„ .. ~_ ethyl 4-(6-methoxynaphthalen-2-yl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate . .„ ethyl 4-(4,7-dimethoxynaphthaleri-l-yl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate PT T3Q emyl 4-(4-(dimethylamino)naphthalen-l-yl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate
PT- 140 ethyl 2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydro-4,5'-biquinoline-3-carboxylate 1 41 ethyl 7,7-dimethyl-5-oxo-4-(5-phenylthiophen-2-yl)-2-propyl-l,4,5,6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate
PT- 142 ethyl 2-methyl-5-oxo-4-(thiophen-2-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate PT- 143 ethyl 2-methyl-5-oxo-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate PT Λ Δ.Δ. emyl 2-methyl-5-oxo-7-phenyl-4-(thiophen-2-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate PT 14S emyl 2-methyl-5-oxo-7-phenyl-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate PT \ Af> emyl 4-(5-chlorothiophen-2-yl)-2,8,8-trimethyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-
3 -carboxylate PT 147 emyl 4-(5-chlorothiophen-2-yl)-7-(furan-2-yl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l, 4,5, 6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate
PT- 148 ethyl 5-oxo-2-propyl-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate PT 14Q emyl 5-0X0-7 -phenyl-2-propyl-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate pτ 1 ςr. ethyl 7-(furan-2-yl)-5-oxo-2-propyl-4-(thiophen-3-yl)- 1,4,5, 6,7, 8-hexahydroquinoline-
3-carboxylate pτ . _ . ethyl 7,7-dimethyl-5-oxo-2-propyl-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate pT 1 — ethyl 7-isopropyl-5-oxo-2-propyl-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate
PT- 153 ethyl 4-(furan-2-yl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate
PT- 154 ethyl 4-(furan-3-yl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate pτ 1 _ _ ethyl 4-(furan-3-yl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-7-phenyl-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinolirie-3- carboxylate PT 1 56 2-methoxyethyl 2,7,7-trimethyl-5-oxo-4-(4-phenoxypheriyl)-l,4,5,6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate _„ 1 ^- isopropyl 2-methyl-4-(naphthalen-2-yl)-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate
„„ 1 C O isopropyl 2-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- r 1 - 1 Jo , , , carboxylate pT -. .„ isopropyl 2,7, 7-trimethyl-5-oxo-4-(4-phenylthiophen-2-yl)- 1,4,5, 6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate PT 1 fif) isopropyl 2,7,7-trimethyl-5-oxo-4-(3-(4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-lH-pyrazol-4-yl)-
1,4,5,6,7, 8-hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate 1 fi - isopropyl 2,7,7-trimethyl-4-(5-methyl-l-o-tolyl-lH-pyrazol-4-yl)-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate PT 169 isopropyl 2,7,7-trimethyl-5-oxo-4-(3-(thiophen-2-yl)-lH-pyrazol-4-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate pτ 1 ,_ 2-methyl-3-(4-phenylpiperidine-l-carbonyl)-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-4,6,7,8- tetrahydroquinolin-5( lH)-one PT 1 f.zl 2-methyl-5-oxo-N-(4-phenylbutyl)-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxamide pT -. , _ 2-methyl-4-(naphthalen-2-yl)-3-(4-phenylpiperazine-l-carbonyl)-4,6,7,8- tetrahydroquinolin-5( lH)-one PT 1 fifi 2-methyl-3-(4-phenylpiperazine-l-carbonyl)-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-4,6,7,8- tetrahydroquinolin-5( lH)-one PT 1 £7 3-(4-(4-chlorophenyl)piperazine-l-carbonyl)-2-methyl-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-4,6,7,8- tetrahydroquinolin-5 ( 1 H) -one PT 1 f.8 N-(l-(2,6-dimethylphenoxy)propan-2-yl)-2,7,7-trimethyl-5-oxo-4-(thiophen-3-yl)- l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxamide PT 160 2-methyl-4-(naphthalen-2-yl)-3-(4-phenylpiperidine-l-carbonyl)-4,6,7,8- tetrahydroquinolin-5( lH)-one . . 2-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-3-(4-phenylpiperidine-l-carbonyl)-4, 6,7,8- tetrahydroquinolin-5( lH)-one pτ 1 71 2-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-3-(l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline-2-carbonyl)-4,6,7,8- tetrahydroquinolin-5( lH)-one 1 _ 3-(l-(2-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carbonyl)piperidin-4-yl)benzoic acid . , 4-(l-(2-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carbonyl)piperidin-4-yl)benzoic acid
N-(3,3-diphenylpropyl)-2,7,7-trimethyl-5-oxo-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxamide pT 1 -^- N-(3,3-diphenylpropyl)-4-(3-(4-fluorophenyl)-lH-pyrazol-4-yl)-2,7,7-trimethyl-5-oxo-
1,4,5, 6,7, 8-hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxamide
N-(furan-2-ylmethyl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-4-(thiophen-2-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxamide
PT- 177 N-benzyl-2-methyl-5-oxo-4-(thiophen-2-yl)-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxamide
. o N-benzyl-2-methyl-5-oxo-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-l,4, 5,6,7, 8-hexahydroquinoline-3- r 1 - 1 / o , ■ , carboxamide
N-benzyl-4-(furan-3-yl)-2-methyl -5-oxo- 1,4,5,6,7, 8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxamide
PT 1 SO N-(2,6-dimethylphenyl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-l, 4,5, 6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxamide
. o ethyl 2-methyl-5-oxo-4-(thiophen-2-yl)-4,5-dihydro-lH-indeno[l,2-b]pyridine-3- r l - l o / i i . carboxylate
„„ i oo ethyl 2-chloro-6-methoxy-2'-methyl-5'-oxo-r,4',5',6',7',8'-hexahydro-3,4'-biquinoline- r l - loo O 1 i i . 3 -carboxylate
PT 1 SQ ethyl 4-(2-chloropyridin-3-yl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate
PT- 190 ethyl 2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydro-4,4'-biquinoline-3-carboxylate pτ , ,^- 2-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-3-(piperidine-l-carbonyl)-4,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinolin-
5(lH)-one PT ?fifi 2-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5-oxo-N'-(2-phenylacetyl)-l,4,5,6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carbohydrazide
4-(l-(2-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carbonyl)piperidin-4-yl)benzamide
4-(4-(2-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5-oxo- 1,4,5,6,7, 8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carbonyl)piperazin-l-yl)benzoic acid , „, 4-chloro-2-methoxybenzyl 4-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l, 4,5, 6,7,8- hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate benzyl 2-methyl-4-(naphthalen-2-yl)-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate
PT-323 benzyl 2-methyl-5-oxo-4-phenyl-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate benzyl 4-(2-(benzyloxy)phenyl)-2-methyl-5-oxo- 1,4,5,6,7, 8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate benzyl 4-(2-bromophenyl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate PT ^A t»enzyl 4-(anthracen-9-yl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate ,, _ benzyl 4-(benzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate
PT-336 benzyl 4-(biphenyl-2-yl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate PT 4S9 ethyl 4-(4-(2-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carbonyl)piperazin- 1 -yl)benzoate
[0158] Given a desired product, such as for example set out in the above table, the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example 7A.
Example 7D: Preparation of a compound of Formula (VI) varying R4, R5, R6 [0159] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 7A and 7B above, but optionally replacing the 1,3-cyclohexanedione (11) with another 1,3- cyclohexanedione having the general structure (11) set out in Example 7A (or replacing it with a 1,3-cyclopentanedione having the general structure (13), as explained at the end of Example 7A), and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula Ri-C(O)H and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds , further compounds of Formula (VI) may be prepared.
EXAMPLE 8
Example 8 A: General method for synthesis of compounds of Formula (I)
Figure imgf000061_0001
(2) (3) (15)
[0160] Referring to the above reaction, the aldehyde (2) is reacted with a beta-keto compound (3) to give the product (15), which is a compound of Formula (I). Given a desired product (15) for which the substituent groups Ri, X(R2)(R3), and R4 are defined, the necessary starting materials (2) and (3) may be determined by inspection. In certain cases, X is a nitrogen and R2 and R3 may be substituents (such as are described elsewhere herein) bound to the nitrogen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta- keto amide. In certain other cases, X taken together with R3 is an oxygen and R2 may be a substituent (such as described elsewhere herein) bound to the oxygen, such that the beta-keto compound (3) is a beta-keto ester.
[0161] To a solution of the aldehyde (2) (5.0 mmole) in hot ethanol (15 ml) was added the beta-keto ester or beta-keto amide (3) (10.0 mmole) followed by the ammonium acetate (10.0 mmole). The mixture is heated to reflux for 15h. Sometimes a precipitate would occur and workup consisted of filtration and washing with ether-hexanes mixtures. If a precipitate did not appear, the crude reaction mixture is reduced in vacuo. The material is then dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with water (2X), saturated aqueous NaHCO3, then brine. The organic phase is decanted and reduced in vacuo and purified on a silca gel flash column to provide the pure desired product (15). Example 8B: Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) in which R2 is propyl, R3 is ethoxycarbonyl, R4 is 5-bromothiophen-2-yl, R5 is ethoxy, and R6 is propyl [0162] Synthesis of diethyl 4-(5-bromothiophen-2-yl)-2,6-dipropyl-l,4- dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate (PT-182):
Figure imgf000062_0001
PT- 182
[0163] To a solution of ethyl propylacetoacetate (1.59 ml, 10.0 mmole) in hot ethanol (20 ml) was added 5-bromo-2-thiophenecarboxaldehyde (0.958 ml, 5.0 mmole) followed by the ammonium acetate (0.616 g, 8.0 mmole). The mixture was held at reflux for 24h. No precipitate was formed. The reaction mixture was reduced in vacuo. The crude material was dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with water (2X) and the organic phase was reduced in vacuo. This material was applied to 150g Siθ2 flash column and eluted with 25% ethyl acetate: hexanes eluent to provide the desired product (2.Og, 85%) as a light yellow oil. Rf = 0.45 in 30% ethyl acetate: hexanes. 1H NMR ( 400 MHz; CDCl3) δ 6.77 (d, IH, J = 3.9 Hz); 6.54 (dd, IH, J = 3.9, 0.78 Hz); 5.9 (bs,lH); 5.28 (s, IH); 4.23-4.15 (m, 4H); 2.81-2.72 (m, 2H); 2.64-2.56 (m, 2H); 1.72-1.54 (m, 4H); 1.28 (at, 6H, J = 7.0 Hz); 0.88 (at, 6H, J = 7.4 Hz). LC MS shows MH + at 470 and 472.
Example 8C: Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) varying R2, R3, R4, R5, R6 [0164] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 8A and 8B above, but optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula R1-C(O)H, and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds (e.g. acetoacetate or acetoacetamide) having the necessary substituents to result in the indicated products, the following compounds of Formula (I) were prepared: Table 7:
ID
(PT-nnn) Name of Compound
PT- 107 diethyl 2,6-dimethyl-4-(naphthalen-2-yl)-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT- 108 diethyl 2,6-dimethyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT mo diethyl 4-(2,3-dihydrobenzo[b][l,4]dioxin-6-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5- dicarboxylate
PT-110 diethyl 2,6-dimethyl-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT-111 diethyl 2,6-dimethyl-4-(thiophen-2-yl)-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT 1 1 9 5-(3,5-bis(ethoxycarbonyl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridin-4-yl)thiophene-2- carboxylic acid
PT- 113 diethyl 4-(5-ethylthiophen-2-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT- 114 diethyl 4-(benzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT- 115 diethyl 4-(benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT 1 1 fi diethyl 2,6-dimethyl-4-(3-methylbenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5- dicarboxylate
PT- 117 diethyl 2,6-dimethyl-4-(3-methylbenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)pyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate pT . . n diethyl 4-(5-(4-chlorophenyl)furan-2-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5- dicarboxylate pτ 1 1 Q diethyl 2,6-dimethyl-4-(5-(2-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)furan-2-yl)-l,4-dihydropyridine-
3,5-dicarboxylate
PT- 120 diethyl 4-(furan-3-yl)-2,6-dimethyl- 1 ,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT- 121 diethyl 4-(5-ethylfuran-2-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT- 122 diethyl 4-(benzofuran-2-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT- 123 diisopropyl 2,6-dimethyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT 194 diisopropyl 4-(5-bromothiophen-2-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5- dicarboxylate pτ .. ,-, _ bis(2-methoxyethyl) 4-(3-bromothiophen-2-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5- dicarboxylate PT 1 9^. diisopropyl 4-(5-(4-chlorophenyl)furan-2-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5- dicarboxylate 1 9 diisopropyl 4-(l-(4-fluorophenyl)-5-methyl-lH-pyrazol-4-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4- dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate no diisopropyl 4-(3-(4-fluorophenyl)-lH-pyrazol-4-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-
3,5-dicarboxylate
PT- 129 dibenzyl 2,6-dimethyl-4-(naphthalen-2-yl)- 1 ,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT 1 ^n bis(3,4-dimethoxybenzyl) 2,6-dimethyl-4-(naphthalen-2-yl)-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5- dicarboxylate PT- 181 diethyl 4-(5-bromothiophen-2-yl)-2,6-diethyl- 1 ,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate
PT- 182 diethyl 4-(5-bromothiophen-2-yl)-2,6-dipropyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate „„ i oα diethyl 4-(5-bromothiophen-2-yl)-2,6-diisopropyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5- dicarboxylate
PT- 191 diethyl 1 ,2,6-trimethyl-4-(naphthalen- 1 -yl)-l ,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT-429 diethyl 4-(2,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT-430 diethyl 4-(2-bromophenyl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT A'W diethyl 4-(2-cyano-4-methoxyphenyl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5- dicarboxylate PT 4^9 diethyl 4-(2-fluoro-4-methoxyphenyl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5- dicarboxylate PT AII diethyl 4-(2-methoxy-4-nitrophenyl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydrc>pyridine-3,5- dicarboxylate
PT-434 diethyl 4-(2-methoxyphenyl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT 4^6 diethyl 4-(4-(dimethylamino)-2-methoxyphenyl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-
3,5-dicarboxylate PT A.X1 diethyl 4-(4-(dimethylamino)-2-nitrophenyl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5- dicarboxylate
PT-438 diethyl 4-(biphenyl-2-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT-439 diethyl 4-(biphenyl-3-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate
[0165] Given a desired product, such as for example set out in the above table, the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example 8A.
Example 8D: Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) varying R2, R3, R4, R5, R6 [0166] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Example 8A and 8B above, but optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula Ri-C(O)H, and/or replacing the beta-keto compound (3) with other beta-keto compounds (e.g. acetoacetate or acetoacetamide), further compounds of Formula (I) may be prepared.
EXAMPLE 9 Example 9A: General method for synthesis of compounds of Formula (I)
Figure imgf000064_0001
(16a) X= -CN (17a) X= -CN
(11 ) (2) (16b) X= -C(O)-O-R2 (17 b) X= -C(O)-O-R2
[0167] Referring to the above reaction, the 1,3-cyclohexanedione (11) is reacted with an aldehyde (2) and malononitrile (16a) (X= -CN) or a cyanoacetate ester (16b) (X= - C(0)-0-R2) to give the product (17a) or (17b), which is a compound of Formula (I). Given a desired product (17a) or (17b) for which the substituent groups Ri, X, RsI1 R52, Rόi, Rβ2, R71, R72, are defined, the necessary starting materials (2), (11), and (16a) or (16b) may be determined by inspection.
[0168] A solution of the aldehyde (2) (10.0 mmole) and malononitrile (16a) or cyanoactetate ester (16b) (10.0 mmole) in hot ethanol (20.0 ml) is heated at reflux for 15 minutes. Observe a copious amount of precipitate, which is the malononitrile Knoevenagel product if malononitrile (16a) was used or an alpha-cyano ester product if the cyanoactetate ester (16b) was used. To this mixture is added the 1,3- cyclohexanedione (11) and the mixture is heated at reflux for 2h, then stirred at room temperature for 16h. The crude reaction is reduced in vacuo and dissolved in ethyl acetate. It is washed with water then brine. The organic phase is decanted and reduced in vacuo to provide solid material. It is filtered and washed with ethyl ether to provide clean desired material.
[0169] It is noted that essentially the same reaction may be performed, but substituting a 1,3-cyclopentanedione (13) and ending with the product (18a) or (18b), as shown here:
Figure imgf000065_0001
(16a) X= -CN (18a) X= -CN
(13) (2) (16b) X= -C(O)-O-R2 (18b) X= -C(O)-O-R2
[0170] Thus, compounds of the invention having the structure given by Formula (I) wherein R5 and R6 taken together form a bridging group may be synthesized as described in this example.
Example 9B: Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) in which R4 is phenyl, R3 is ethoxycarbonyl, R2 is amino, and R5 and R6 taken together form a bridging group [0171] Synthesis of ethyl 2-amino-5-oxo-4-phenyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-4H-chromene-3- carboxylate (PT-097):
Figure imgf000066_0001
PT-097
[0172] To a solution of 1,3-cyclohexane dione (0.56g, 5.0 mmole) in hot ethanol (10 ml) was added ethyl frYms-α-cyanocinnamate (l.Og, 5.0 mmole) and the mixture heated at reflux for 18h. The mixture was cooled to room temperature, filtered and washed with ethanol to provide the desired product (1.30g, 83%) as a white powder. 1H NMR ( 400 MHz; CDCl3) δ 7.29-7.0 (m, 5H); 6.2 (bs, 2H); 4.72 ( s,lH); 4.09-3.96 (m, 2H); 2.64-2.48 (m, 2H); 2.40-2.26 (m, 2H); 2.06-1.88 (m, 2H); 1.14 (t, 3H, J = 7.4 Hz). LC MS shows MH + at 314.
Example 9C: Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) in which R4 is furan-2-yl, R3 is cvano, R2 is amino, R5 is ethoxy, and R6 is methyl
[0173] This example describes a synthesis that is essentially similar to Examples 9A and 9B, except the cyclic diones of Examples 9A and 9B are replaced in this Example with an open-chain (non-cyclic) beta-ketoester.
[0174] Synthesis of ethyl 6-amino-5-cyano-4-(furan-2-yl)-2-methyl-4H-pyran-3- carboxylate (PT-092):
Figure imgf000066_0002
PT-092
[0175] To a solution of (2-furanylmethylene)malononitrile (0.72g, 5.0 mmole) in hot ethanol (5.0 ml) was added ethyl acetoacetate (0.647 ml, 5.0 mmole) followed by 1 drop of pyrrolidine. The mixture was refluxed for 15h. Upon cooling the mixture to room temperature a precipitate formed. The mixture was filtered to provide the desired product (0.753g, 55%) as pinkish powder. Rf= 0.4 in 50% ethyl actetate:hexanes. 1H NMR ( 400 MHz; CDCl3) δ 7.295 (m, IH); 6.27 (dd, IH, J = 3.1, 1.95 Hz); 6.10 (d, IH, J = 3.1 Hz); 4.63 (s, IH); 4.50 (bs, 2H); 4.22-4.07 (m, 2H); 2.36 (s, 3H); 1.20 (t, 3H, J = 7.0 Hz). LC MS shows MH + at 275.
[0176] This example describes a synthesis that is essentially similar to Examples 9A and 9B above, except the cyclic diones of Examples 9A and 9B are replaced in this Example with an open-chain (non-cyclic) beta-ketoester, providing for a product in which R5 and R6 do not form a bridging group. Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 9A above, but replacing the cyclic dione (11) or (13) with a beta-ketoester (either ethyl acetoacetate as in this example, above, or other beta- ketoesters such as are described elsewhere herein), and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula Ri-C(O)H and/or replacing the malononitrile (16a) (X= -CN) or cyanoacetate ester (16b) (X= -C(O)-O-R2) with other cyanoacetate ester (16b) compounds (e.g. ethyl cyanoacetate or benzyl cyanoacetate), further compounds of Formula (I) in which R5 and R6 do not form a bridging group may be prepared.
Example 9D: Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) varying R3, R4, R5, R6 [0177] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 9A and 9B above, but optionally replacing the 1,3-cyclohexanedione (11) with another 1,3- cyclohexanedione having the general structure (11) set out in Example 9A (or replacing it with a 1,3-cyclopentanedione having the general structure (13), as explained at the end of Example 9A), and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula R1-C(O)H, and/or replacing the malononitrile (16a) (X= -CN) or cyanoacetate ester (16b) (X= -C(O)-O-R2) with other cyanoacetate ester (16b) compounds (e.g. ethyl cyanoacetate or benzyl cyanoacetate) having the necessary substituents to result in the indicated products, the following compounds of Formula (I) were prepared:
Table 8: ID
(PT-nnn) Name of Compound
2-amino-4-(4-bromophenyl)-5-oxo-4,5,6,7-tetrahydrocyclopenta[b]pyran-3- carbonitrile
PT CiQA 2-amino-4-(4-bromophenyl)-5 -oxo-7 -phenyl -5,6,7, 8-tetrahydro-4H-chromene-3- carbonitrile
PT-096 2-amino-4-(4-bromophenyl)-5 -oxo-5, 6,7, 8-tetrahydro-4H-chromene-3-carbonitrile PT-097 ethyl 2-amino-5-oxo-4-phenyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-4H-chromene-3-carboxylate PT DOS 3-(2-amino-3-cyano-7,7-dimethyl-5-oxo-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-4H-chromen-4- yljbenzoic acid
PT-099 2-amino-5-oxo-4-(thiophen-2-yl)-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-4H-chromene-3-carbonitrile PT-100 2-amino-5-oxo-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-4H-chromene-3-carbonitrile PT 1 f)1 2-amino-5-oxo-7-phenyl-4-(thiophen-2-yl)-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-4H-chromene-3- carbonitrile pT -. „, 2-amino-5-oxo-7-phenyl-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-4H-chromene-3- carbonitrile
PT-103 2-amino-4-(furan-2-yl)-5-oxo-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-4H-chromene-3-carbonitrile PT 1 fU 2-amino-4-(furan-2-yl)-5-oxo-7-phenyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-4H-chromene-3- carbonitrile
PT-105 2-amino-4-(4-bromophenyl)-5-oxo-5,7-dihydro-4H-furo[3,4-b]pyran-3-carbonitrile PT- 106 2-amino-4-(furan-2-yl)-5-oxo-4,5-dihydropyrano[3,2-c]chromene-3-carbonitrile
[0178] Given a desired product, such as for example set out in the above table, the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example 9A.
Example 9E: Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) varying R3, R4, R5, R6 [0179] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 9A and 9B above, but optionally replacing the 1,3-cyclohexanedione (11) with another 1,3- cyclohexanedione having the general structure (11) set out in Example 9A (or replacing it with a 1,3-cyclopentanedione having the general structure (13), as explained at the end of Example 9A), and/or optionally replacing the aldehyde (2) with other aldehydes of general formula R1-C(O)H and/or replacing the malononitrile (16a) (X= -CN) or cyanoacetate ester (16b) (X= -C(O)-O-R2) with other cyanoacetate ester (16b) compounds (e.g. ethyl cyanoacetate or benzyl cyanoacetate), further compounds of Formula (I) may be prepared.
EXAMPLE 10
Further preparation of compounds of Formula (I) Example IQA: Suzuki coupling procedure
[0180] Compounds of Formulas (I) - (VI) that have halo substituents on aromatic rings (e.g. aryl or heteroaryl rings of R4 or R5 or elsewhere in the molecule) may be made as described above in Examples 1-9. These compounds having halo-substituted aryl groups may then be modified using a Suzuki coupling procedure. An example is given here.
[0181] Synthesis of (4'-methoxybiphenyl-4-yl)methyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl>
4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate (PT- 199):
Suzuki Coupling
Figure imgf000069_0001
Figure imgf000069_0002
PT-029 PT- 199
[0182] PT-029 (200 mg; 0.38 mmole) was dissolved in dry DME (4ml) and dry DMF (0.5ml) while heating to 500C. After dissolution, the solution was cooled to room temperature and para-methoxyphenylboronic acid (145 mg; 0.95 mmole) was added followed by 1.0 ml of a 2M Na2CO3 solution, then Pd(Cl)2(PPh3)2 (70 mg; 0.1 mmole). The mixture was then heated at 82°C for 15h. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and ethyl acetate was added. The organic phase was washed with saturated NaHCO3 solution, and the organic phase was separated and dried over MgSO4 The organic phase was filtered from the magnesium sulfate and then evaporated in vacuo. The crude material was purified on a silca gel column (15g) using 1:1 ethyl acetate : hexanes eluent ( Rf = 0.35 ) to provide 81 mg ( 42% ) of PT-199 as a light grey powder. H1 NMR (400 MHz) (CDCl3) 10.2 (IH), 8.5-6.6 (m,16H), 4.98 (d, J=12.5 Hz, IH), 4.92 ( d, J=12.5 Hz, IH), 3.9 (s, 3H), 2.85 (s, 3H). LC MS shows 96% purity and MS CI 504 (M+H) and 1007 (2M+H).
Example IQB: Suzuki coupling procedure
[0183] Another Example of a Suzuki coupling procedure on a compound of Formula
(I) is given here.
Figure imgf000070_0001
[0184] Procedure: To a solution of PT-387 (855 mg, 2.00 mmol) and (20) (500 mg, 3.00 mmol) in DMF (15 niL) was added K2CO3 (830 mg, 6.00 mmol) and H2O (3 niL). The reaction mixture was stirred for 5 min under an atmosphere of dry N2. PdCl2(PPh3)2 (70 mg, 0.10 mmol) was added, and the resulting mixture was heated at 86° C for 5 h. The mixture was cooled, diluted with EtOAc (20 mL), filtered through a layer of celite, washed with EtOAc (80 mL) and H2O (80 mL) and transferred to a separation funnel. The organic phase was washed with 0.1 N LiOH (100 mL, 10.00 mmol), and the combined aqeuous phase was washed with diethyl ether (50 mL), then EtOAc (2 x 50 mL). The pH value was adjusted to 2-3, and the milkish precipitate was filtered, washed with H2O (500 mL), and dried to give a gel-like solid. LCMS showed only 70% as the desired product. To the crude product was added boiling EtOAc (30 mL) and the mixture was sonicated, filtered, washed with EtOAc (30 mL), and dried to afford a white solid PT-254 (286 mg, 31%). MS mz 468.2 (M+H). >94% HPLC purity. 1H NMR (400 MHz; dmso-D6) 11.3 (s, IH); 7.98 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H ); 7.30- 7.60 (m, 5H); 7.10-7.28 (m, 4H); 6.84 (d, J = 6.3 Hz, 2H); 6.73 (s, IH); 4.96 (q, J = 13.0 Hz, 2H); 2.53 (d, J = 2.0 Hz, 3H).
Example IQC: Suzuki coupling procedure
[0185] Another Example of a Suzuki coupling procedure on a compound of Formula
(I) is given here.
Figure imgf000070_0002
[0186] Procedure: To a solution of PT-387 (427 mg, 1.00 mmol) and (21) (208 mg, 1.50 mmol) in DMF (2.5 niL) was added K2CO3 (345 mg, 2.50 mmol) and H2O (0.5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred for 5 min under an atmosphere of dry N2. PdCl2(PPh3)2 (35 mg, 0.05 mmol) was added, and the resulting mixture was capped, heated at 150° C in a Personal Chemistry microwave for 40 min. The mixture was cooled, decanted to a round-bottom flask, washed with 10% DMF in ethyl acetate (EtOAc) (50 mL), filtered through a layer of celite, again washed with 10% DMF in EtOAc (50 mL), and transferred to a separation funnel. The organic phase was washed with 2N NaHCO3 (10 mL, 20.0 mmol), H2O (20 mL), 30% aqueous NH4Cl (50 mL) and brine (50 mL), and then was dried to give yellow solid. Methanol in ether (0.5, 1.5 mL, respectively) was added, and the mixture was sonicated, filtered, washed with 25% MeOH in ether (8 mL), and then dried to give white solid PT-300 (299 mg, 0.68 mmol, 68%). MS mz 441.2 (M+H). HPLC purity >95%. 1H NMR (400 MHz; dmso-D6) 11.3 (s, IH); 8.22 (s, 2H ); 7.30-7.50 (m, 3H); 7.15-7.25 (m, 4H); 6.85 (dd, J = 6.6 and 1.5 Hz, 2H); 6.79 (s, IH); 6.70 (s, IH); 5.07 (s, IH); 4.89 (s, IH); 2.44 (s, 3H).
Example IQD: Preparation of a compounds using Suzuki coupling procedure to modify a halo-aryl group
[0187] Compounds of Formulas (I)-(VI) that have halo substituents on aromatic rings (e.g. aryl or heteroaryl rings of R4 or R5 or elsewhere on the molecule) were made as described in Examples 1-9. The R4 or R5 groups were then modified by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 1OA, 1OB and 1OC above, but optionally replacing the aryl-boronic acid with other aryl-boronic acids and/or optionally replacing the compound having the aryl-halo group (e.g. a compound of any of Formulas (I)-(VI) ) with another compound having an halo-aryl group. The following compounds of Formula (I) were prepared.
Table 9: ID
(PT-nnn) Name of Compound PT 1 QQ (4'-methoxybiphenyl-4-yl)methyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate - - - (4'-(methoxycarbonyl)biphenyl-4-yl)methyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
-,, _ (R)-benzyl 5-methyl-7-(2-(5-methylfuran-2-yl)phenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate -,, , (R)-benzyl 5-methyl-7-(4'-(trifluoromethyl)biphenyl-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
(R)-benzyl 7-(2-(5-chlorothiophen-2-yl)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
(R)-benzyl 7-(3'-carbamoylbiphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
(R)-benzyl 7-(3'-cyanobiphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-
6-carboxylate PT 940 (R)-benzyl 7-(3'-fluorobiphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-
6-carboxylate PT 941 (R)-benzyl 7-(3'-methoxybiphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 949 (R)-benzyl 7-(4'-carbamoylbiphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT IATK (R)-benzyl 7-(4'-cyanobiphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-
6-carboxylate PT 94S 2'-(3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-2-methyl-5-oxo- 1,4,5, 6,7, 8-hexahydroquinolin-4- yl)biphenyl-3-carboxylic acid PT 940 2'-(3-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinolin-4- yl)biphenyl-4-carboxylic acid - _„ 2'-(3-(ethoxycarbonyl)-2-methyl-5-oxo- 1,4, 5,6,7, 8-hexahydroquinolin-4-yl)biphenyl-4- carboxylic acid - _, 2'-(6-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7- yl)biphenyl-3-carboxylic acid PT 9S4 2'-(6-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7- yl)biphenyl-4-carboxylic acid - ,, 3-(2-(6-(methoxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7- yl)benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl)benzoic acid _ <_ 3-(3-(6-(methoxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7- yl)benzo [b]thiophen-2-yl)benzoic acid
4-(2-(6-(ethoxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7-yl)thiophen-
3-yl)benzoic acid - _, 4-(3-(6-((cyclopropylmethoxy)carbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidin-7-yl)benzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)benzoic acid PT 904 4-(3-(6-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7- yl)benzo [b]thiophen-2-yl)benzoic acid
4-(3-(6-(methoxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7- yl)benzo [b]thiophen-2-yl)benzoic acid PT ^44 benzyl 5-methyl-7-(2'-methylbiphenyl-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT ^48 benzyl 5-methyl-7-(3'-(methylsulfonamido)biphenyl-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6 -carboxylate PT ^4Q benzyl 5-methyl-7-(3'-(trifluoromethyl)biphenyl-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6 -carboxylate , _„ benzyl 5-methyl-7-(3'-methylbiphenyl-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate pτ ,^1 benzyl 5-methyl-7-(3-phenylfuran-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate , _- benzyl 5-methyl-7-(3-phenylthiophen-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT ^S4 benzyl 5-methyl-7-(4'-(methylsulfonyl)biphenyl-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6 -carboxylate PT ^n benzyl 5-methyl-7-(4'-morpholinobiphenyl-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6 -carboxylate PT ^f.1 benzyl 5-methyl-7-(4'-nitrobiphenyl-2-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT ^fifi benzyl 6-methyl-4-(4'-(methylsulfonamido)biphenyl-2-yl)-4,7-dihydro-lH- pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5-carboxylate benzyl 7-(2-(2-aminopyrimidin-5-yl)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6 -carboxylate benzyl 7-(2-(3,5-dimethylisoxazol-4-yl)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6 -carboxylate benzyl 7-(2-(4-methoxyphenyl)benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl)-5-methyl-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate α oo benzyl 7-(2'-carbamoylbiphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-
6-carboxylate benzyl 7-(2'-cyanobiphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate benzyl 7-(3-(4-fluorophenyl)furan-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6 -carboxylate ,, _ benzyl 7-(3-(4-fluorophenyl)thiophen-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6 -carboxylate PT ^QQ benzyl 7-(3'-aminobiphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT A(M benzyl 7-(4'-(benzyloxy)biphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6 -carboxylate PT 41 ^ benzyl 7-(4'-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)biphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6 -carboxylate PT 41 S benzyl 7-(4'-acetylbiphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT _19n benzyl 7-(4'-methoxybiphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate diethyl 2,6-dimethyl-4-(2-((2S)-5-methyltetrahydrothiophen-2-yl)phenyl)-l,4- dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT 498 diethyl 2,6-dimethyl-4-(4'-(methylsulfonamido)biphenyl-2-yl)-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5- dicarboxylate
PT-435 diethyl 4-(3'-cyanobiphenyl-2-yl)-2,6-dimethyl-l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate PT _1S1 ethyl 4-(3'-acetylbiphenyl-2-yl)-6-methyl-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5- carboxylate PT 4SS ethyl 4-(4'-carbamoylbiphenyl-2-yl)-2-methyl-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3- carboxylate PT 471 ethyl 6-methyl-4-(4'-(methylsulfonamido)biphenyl-2-yl)-4,7-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4- b]pyridine-5-carboxylate PT AQ& ethyl 7-(3-(3-fluorophenyl)thiophen-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6 -carboxylate PT zLQQ ethyl 7-(3'-cyanobiphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate _ „, ethyl 7-(4'-cyanobiphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate
PT-505 H-indol-5-yl)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
[0188] Given a desired product, such as for example set out in the above table, the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example IA. Example IQE: Preparation of a compounds using Suzuki coupling procedure to modify a halo-aryl group
[0189] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 1OA, 1OB and 1OC above, but optionally replacing the starting material, i.e. the compound of Formulas (I)-(VI) that has a halo substituent on an aromatic ring, with another compound of Formulas (I)-(VI) that has a halo substituent on an aromatic ring, and/or optionally replacing the aryl-boronic acid with another aryl-boronic acids, further compounds of Formula (I) may be prepared.
EXAMPLE 11
Further preparation of compounds of Formula (I) Example HA: Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) varying Rl [0190] Compounds of Formula (I) in which the Q2 group is >N-H (i.e. Rl is -H) may be made as described in Examples 1-10 and elsewhere herein and then may be modified to change the identity of the Rl group. An example is given here: [0191] Synthesis of benzyl 4,5-dimethyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate (PT- 195):
Figure imgf000074_0001
PT-027 PT- 195
[0192] Dissolve PT-027 (397 mg; 1.0 mmole) in dry THF (5ml) at room temperature. Methyl iodide was then added ( 0.62 ml; 10.0 mmole ) followed by sodium hydride (60% in oil; 200 mg; 5.0 mmole). Let stir at room temperature for 12h. Dilute reaction with ethyl acetate and transfer to a separatory funnel and washed with saturated NaHCO3 then brine. The organic phase is dried over MgSO4, filtered then evaporated in vacuo. The compound is then purified on a silica gel column (2Og) using 1 : 1 ethyl acetate: hexanes eluent to provide PT-195 (Rf = 0.25) 293 mg (71%) as white powder. H1 NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3) 8.5 (d, J=8.2 Hz, IH); 7.9-7.8 (m, 2H); 7.6-7.3 (m, 3H); 7.12 (t, J=7.5 Hz, IH); 7.0 (appt, J=7.5 Hz, 2H); 6.62 (appd, J=7.4 Hz, 2H); 4.84 (s,2H); 3.7 (s,3H); 2.8 (s,3H). MS CI 412 ( M+H ) and 845 (2M+H). [0193] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in this example above, but optionally replacing the methyl iodide with another alkyl halide compound (e.g. R- X wherein R is optionally substituted lower alkyl and X is a halide, such as chloro, bromo, or iodo) and/or optionally replacing the PT-027 compound with another compound of Formula (I) in which the Q2 group is >N-H, further compounds of Formula (I) may be prepared.
Example 1 IB: Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) varying Rl [0194] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures described above in Example 1 IA, other examples of Compounds of Formula (I) in which the Rl group is varied may be made. The compounds in the following table were made by essentially following the procedures described above in Example 1 IA, with modifications described below.
Table 10: ID
(PT-nnn) Name of Compound
_„ r- rη 2-(6-(benzyloxycarbonyl)-5-memyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)tetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin- "2^ 4(7H)-yl)acetic acid
„„ o co 2-(6-(ethoxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)tetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-4(7H)- r l -ZJo 1 N , - ■ , yl) acetic acid pT O T 1 benzyl 4-(2-ethoxy-2-oxoethyl)-5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate benzyl 4-(cyanomethyl)-5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 44Q et^ 4-(2-ethoxy-2-oxoethyl)-5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT ASf. emyl 4-(cyanomethyl)-5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT 4Qf) emyl 7-(2-bromophenyl)-4-(2-(2,6-dimethylphenylamino)-2-oxoethyl)-5-methyl-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
[0195] The parent compound (the compound of Formula (I) in which the Q2 group is >N-H) was first prepared as described in Examples 1-10 and elsewhere herein. The parent compound (1.0 mmole) was then dissolved in dry DMF (5ml) at room temperature. The (optionally substituted) alkyl halide compound was then added (10.0 mmole). Various examples of alkyl halide compounds employed included bromoacetonitrile (for product in which Rl is -CH2-CN); t-butyl bromoacetate (for product in which Rl is -CH2-C(O)Ot-Bu); ethyl bromoacetate (for product in which Rl is -CH2-C(O)O-Et); 2-chloro-N-(2,6-dimethylphenyl)acetamide (for product in which Rl is -CH2-C(O)-NH-(2,6-dimethylphenyl). Addition of the alkyl halide compound was followed by addition of potassium ^-butoxide (5.0 mmole). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 12h. Dilute reaction with ethyl acetate and transfer to a separatory funnel and washed with saturated NaHCU3 then brine. The organic phase is dried over MgSO4, filtered then evaporated in vacuo. The compound is then purified on a silica gel column (2Og), typically using 1: 1 ethyl acetate: hexanes eluent to provide the product compound of Formula (I). In a variation of the synthesis, for product compounds in which the Rl group includes a carboxylic acid group, the corresponding t-butyl ester is first prepared as described in this Example, and the t- butyl ester is then hydrolysed, for example in aqueous HCl, to provide the product compound. It should be noted that, throughout many of the Examples (e.g. Examples 1-10, and also elsewhere herein) when a compound of the invention (e.g. of Formula (I) or as otherwise described herein) has a carboxylic acid group as part of its structure, the preparation of the compound may proceed by first forming a carboxylic ester, followed by cleavage of the ester, e.g. by hydrolysis in aqueous acid or by saponification. [0196] Given a desired product, such as for example set out in the above table, the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example 1 IA and 1 IB.
[0197] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in this example above, but optionally replacing the alkyl halide compound with another (optionally substituted) alkyl halide compound and/or optionally replacing the parent compound with another compound of Formula (I) in which the Q2 group is >N-H, further compounds of Formula (I) may be prepared.
EXAMPLE 12
Further preparation of compounds of Formula (I)
Example 12A: Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) with a pendant tetrazolo substituent
[0198] Compounds of Formulas (I) - (VI) that have cyano substituents (e.g. on aryl or heteroaryl rings of R4 or R5, or as a substituent on an alkyl group, or elsewhere in the molecule) may be made as described above in Examples 1-11 and elsewhere herein. These compounds having cyano-substituents may then be modified as described in this example to convert the cyano substituent into a tetrazolo group using sodium azide. An example is given here.
[0199] Synthesis of 4-(lH-tetrazol-5-yl)benzyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate (PT-060):
Figure imgf000077_0001
PT-046 PT-060
[0200] Dissolve PT-046 (lOOmg; 0.23 mmole) in dry DME (3 ml). Add sodium azide (150 mg; 2.3 mmole ) followed by triethylamine hydrochloride (315mg; 2.3 mmole). The mixture is heated at 85°C for 15h. The reaction is cooled to room temperature and water is then added (15 ml). A precipitate comes out of solution and is then filtered. The powder is then dried on a high vacuum for 12h to provide PT-060 (60mg; 57%) as a white powder. H1 NMR 400 MHz (DMSO-D6) 8.6 (bs, IH); 8.0-6.5 (m, 12H); 4.96 (d, J=13.3 Hz, IH); 4.82 (d, J=13.3 Hz, IH); 2.6 (s, 3H). MS CI 466 (M+H); 931 ( 2M+H ).
Example 12B: Preparation of a compound of Formula (I) with a pendant tetrazolo substituent
[0201] Compounds of Formulas (I) - (VI) that have cyano substituents (e.g. on aryl or heteroaryl rings of R4 or R5, or as a substituent on an alkyl group, or elsewhere in the molecule) may be made as described above in Examples 1-11 and elsewhere herein. These compounds having cyano-substituents may then be modified as described in this example to convert the cyano substituent into a tetrazolo group using sodium azide. [0202] By essentially following the procedures set out in Example 12A above, but optionally replacing the PT-046 compound with another compound of Formulas (I) - (VI) that has a cyano substituent (e.g. on aryl or heteroaryl rings of R4 or R5, or as a substituent on an alkyl group, or elsewhere in the molecule) and has the necessary substituents to result in the indicated products, the following compounds of Formula (I) were prepared:
Table 11:
ID (PT-nnn) Name of Comopound
4-(lH-tetrazol-5-yl)benzyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-
PT-060 a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
2-( lH-tetrazol-5-yl)ethyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen- 1 -yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[ 1 ,5-
PT-247 a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
3-(lH-tetrazol-5-yl)benzyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- PT-271 a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate benzyl 4-((lH-tetr azol-5-yl)methyl)-5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7- PT-326 dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate benzyl 7-(2-methoxy-4-(lH-tetrazol-5-yl)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- PT-393 a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate benzyl 7-(4-(lH-tetrazol-5-yl)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine- PT-403 6-carboxylate ethyl 4-((lH-tetrazol-5-yl)methyl)-5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7- PT-444 dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate ethyl 7-(2-(4-(lH-tetrazol-5-yl)phenoxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- PT-481 a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate ethyl 7-(3'-(lH-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- PT-493 a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate ethyl 7-(4'-(lH-tetrazol-5-yl)biphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- PT-500 a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
[0203] Given a desired product, such as for example set out in the above table, the necessary starting materials generally may be determined by inspection, based on the general procedure set out in Example 12A.
[0204] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in Examples 12A and 12B above, but optionally replacing the initial compound that has the cyano substituent with another compound of Formulas (I) - (VI) that has a cyano substituent (e.g. on aryl or heteroaryl rings of R4 or R5, or as a substituent on an alkyl group, or elsewhere in the molecule), further compounds of Formula (II) may be prepared. ADDITIONAL EXAMPLES
[0205] The following additional examples further exemplify the preparation of compounds of the present invention.
EXAMPLE 13:
[0206] Synthesis of benzyl 5-methyl-7-(3-phenoxyphenyl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate (PT-024):
Figure imgf000079_0001
PT- 024
[0207] The 5-aminotetrazole (850 mg; 10.0 mmole) was dissolved in hot ethanol (25 ml) with triethylamine (1.8 mmole; 0.25 ml). When all solids were dissolved (about ten minutes of heating at 82°C), 3-phenoxybenzaldehyde ( 1.73 ml; 10.0 mmole) was added followed by benzylacetoacetate (1.72 ml; 10.0 mmole). The clear solution was maintained at reflux for 15 h. A white precipitate had filled the flask and the mixture was cooled to room temperature at which time it was filtered and the material washed with ethanol then ethyl ether to provide the desired product ( 2.5 g; 57% ) as a white powder. 1H NMR ( ^O MHZJ CDCI3) δ 7.34-7.20 ( m, 7H ); 7.14-7.08 ( m, 3H ); 7.06-6.80 ( m, 2H ); 6.96-6.86 ( m, 3H ); 6.70 ( s, IH ); 5.12 ( d, IH, J = 12.3 Hz ); 5.05 (d, IH, J = 12.3 Hz ); 2.7 ( s, 3H ). LC MS shows MH + at 440 and 2MH+ at 879.
EXAMPLE 14:
[0208] Synthesis of 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalen-l-yl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-
4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate (PT-OOl):
Figure imgf000080_0001
[0209] The 5-aminotetrazole (850 mg; 10.0 mmole) was dissolved in hot ethanol (25 ml) with triethylamine (1.8 mmole; 0.25 ml). When all solids were dissolved (about ten minutes of heating at 82°C), 1-naphthaldehyde ( 1.36 ml; 10.0 mmole) was added followed by 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthylacetoacetate (2.32g ; 10.0 mmole). The clear solution was maintained at reflux for 15 h at which time a white precipitate was noted. The mixture was cooled to room temperature and filtered; the material was then washed with ethanol then ethyl ether to provide the desired product ( 1.9 g; 43% ) as a white powder. 1H NMR ( 400 MHz; CDCl3; a 1:1 mixture of diastereomers) δ 11.01 (s, IH); 10.96 (s, IH); 8.4 (d,lH, J = 7.4 Hz); 8.22 (d, IH, J = 7.8 Hz); 7.90-7.68 (m, 4H); 7.52-7.10 (m, 7H); 6.98-6.7 (m, 3H); 6.42-6.34 (m, IH); 6.08 (d, IH, J = 7.0 Hz); 5.77 (bs, 2H); 2.77 (s,3H); 2,76 (s,3H); 2.50-0.5 (m, 14H). LC MS shows MH + at 438 and 2MH+ at 875
EXAMPLE 15:
[0210] Synthesis of ethyl 5-methyl-7-(3-methylbenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate (PT-018):
Figure imgf000080_0002
[0211] The 5-aminotetrazole (850 mg; 10.0 mmole) was dissolved in hot ethanol (25 ml) with triethylamine (1.8 mmole; 0.25 ml). When all solids were dissolved (about ten minutes of heating at 82°C), 3-methyl-2-benzothiophenecarboxaldehyde (1.76g; 10.0 mmole) was added followed by ethylacetoacetate (1.28 ml; 10.0 mmole). The clear solution was maintained at reflux for 15 h. At which time a white precipitate had filled the flask and the mixture was cooled to room temperature where it was filtered and the material washed with ethanol then ethyl ether to provide the desired product ( 1.42 g; 41% ) as a white powder. 1H NMR ( 400 MHz; CDCl3) δ 11.2 ( bs, IH ); 7.73 (d, IH, J= 7.8 Hz); 7.69 (d, IH, J = 7.8 Hz); 7.39 (ddd, IH, J = 7.0, 7.0, 0.78 Hz); 7.32 (ddd, IH, J = 8.2, 7.0, 1.5 Hz); 4.17-4.05 (m, 2H); 2.71 (s, 3H); 2.69 (s, 3H); 1.14 ( at, J = 7.0 Hz). LC MS shows MH + at 356 and 2MH+ at 711.
EXAMPLE 16:
[0212] Synthesis of ethyl 5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate (PT- 192):
Figure imgf000081_0001
PT- 1 92
[0213] To a solution of 5-aminotetrazole (0.85g, 10,0 mmole) and triethylamine (0,25ml, 1.8 mmole) in hot ethanol (25 ml) was added 1-naphthaldehyde (1.36ml, 10.0 mmole) followed by ethyl acetoacetate (1.28ml, 10.0 mmole). The clear solution was heated at reflux for 15h at which time a white powdery precipitate was observed. The mixture was cooled to room temperature, filtered and washed with ethanol and ethyl ether to provide the desired product (1.88g, 56%) as a white powder. 1H NMR (400 MHz; CDCl3) δ 11.0 (s, IH); 8.6 (d, IH, J = 8.6 Hz); 7.9 (d,lH, J = 8.2 Hz); 7.82 (d, IH, J = 7.8 Hz); 7.68 (at, IH, J = 7.4 Hz); 7.6-7.54 (m, 2H); 7.45 (dd, IH, J = 7.4, 1.1 Hz); 7.40 (at, IH, J = 7.8 Hz); 3.9 (q, 2H, J= 7.0 Hz); 2.75 (s, 3H); 0.8 (t, 3H, J = 7.0 Hz). LC MS shows MH + at 336; M+Na at 358; 2M+H at 671 and 2M+Na at 693.
EXAMPLE 17:
[0214] Synthesis of 3-(furan-2-yl)-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-7,8-dihydro-lH-furo[3,4- e]pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridin-5(4H)-one (PT-080):
Figure imgf000082_0001
PT-080
[0215] To a solution of lH-2-amino-4-(2-yl-furan)pyrazole (746mg, 5.0 mmole) in ethanol (15ml) at 82°C was added triethylamine (0.2 ml, 1.4 mmole) followed by 1- naphthaldehyde (0.682 ml, 5.0 mmole) and then tetronic acid (0.50 g, 5.0 mmole). The clear solution mixture was maintained at reflux for 15h. A precipitate had formed and the mixture was cooled to room temperature. The mixture was filtered and washed with ethanol and ethyl ether to provide the desired product ( 1.38 g, 75%) as a white powder. 1H NMR ( 400 MHz; DMSO-d6) δ 12.7 ( bs, IH ); 10.47 (bs, IH); 7.80 (d,lH, J = 9.3 Hz); 7.72 (d, IH, J = 8.6 Hz); 7.60-7.40 (bs, m, 2H); 7.40-7.20 (m, 5H); 7.38 (at, IH, J = 7.4 Hz); 6.30 (bs, IH); 6.1 (bs, IH); 5.9 (bs, 1H);4.87 (s, 2H). LC MS shows MH + at 370 and 2MH+ at 739.
EXAMPLE 18:
[0216] Synthesis of ethyl 2-chloro-6-methoxy-2'-methyl-5'-oxo-l',4',5',6',7',8'- hexahydro-3,4'-biquinoline-3'-carboxylate (PT-188):
Figure imgf000082_0002
PT-188
[0217] To a solution of 1,3-cyclohexanedione (0.56 g, 5.0 mmole) in hot ethanol (10 ml) was added 2-chloro-6-methoxy-3-quinolinecarboxaldehyde ( l.lg, 5.0 mmole) followed by ethyl acetoacetate (0.64 ml, 5.0 mmole) and finally ammonium acetate (0.77g, 10.0 mmole). The mixture was refluxed for 12h at which time a precipitate was observed. The reaction was cooled to room temperature, filtered and washed with ethanol then ethyl ether to provide the desired product (1.36g, 64%) as a golden powder. 1H NMR ( 400 MHz; CDCl3) δ 8.14 (s, IH ); 7.81 (d, IH, J = 8.9 Hz); 7.28 (dd,lH, J = 8.9, 2.7 Hz); 7.06 (d, IH, J = 2.7 Hz); 6.58 (bs, IH); 5.48 (s, IH); 4.10-3.95 (m, 2H); 3.89 (s, 3H); 2.42 (at, 2H, J = 6.5 Hz); 2.35 (s, 3H); 2.28 (at, 2H, J = 6.5 Hz); 2.0-1.80 (m, 2H); 1.13 (t, 3H, J = 7.0 Hz). LC MS shows MH + at 427 and 2M+Na at 875.
EXAMPLE 19:
[0218] Synthesis of isopropyl 2,7,7-trimethyl-5-oxo-4-(3-(4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)- lH-pyrazol-4-yl)- 1,4, 5,6,7, 8-hexahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate (PT- 160):
Figure imgf000083_0001
PT-160
[0219] To a solution of dimedone (0.984 g, 4.1 mmole) in hot ethanol (12 ml) was added 3-(4-trifluoromethylphenyl)-4-pyrazolecarboxaldehyde (1.Og, 4.1 mmole), isopropyl acetoacetate ( 0.6 ml, 4.1 mmole) and lastly ammonium acetate (0.616 g, 8.0 mmole). The mixture was maintained at reflux for 18h. No precipitate formed from the reaction. The reaction mixture was stripped of the ethanol in vacuo. The crude material was dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with water (2X) and the organic phase was separated and stripped in vacuo. The material was then dissolved in ethyl ether and after a few minutes a white precipitate started to form. The white suspension was then filtered over night as it was a slow viscous filtration. The white material was washed with more ether to provide the desired product (1.55 g, 78%) as a white powder. Rf = 0.45 in ethyl acetate. 1H NMR ( 400 MHz; DMSO d6) δ 9.14 (bs, IH);
8.34 (bd, 2H, J = 7.4 Hz); 7.8 (bs, 2H); 7.35 (bs, IH); 5.05 (bs, IH); 4.65-4.55 (m, IH);
3.35 (bs, IH); 2.52 (bs, IH); 2.46 (d, IH, J = 16.8 Hz); 2.32 (d, IH, J = 16.8 Hz); 2.23 (s, 3H); 2.20 (d, IH, J = 16.0 Hz); 2.04 (d, IH, J = 16.0 Hz); 1.05 (s, 3H); 0.93 (s, 3H); 0.7 (d, 3H, J = 6.2 Hz); 0.55 (s, 3H, J = 6.2 Hz). LC MS shows MH + at 488; 2M +H at 975.
EXAMPLE 20:
[0220] Synthesis of diisopropyl 4-(3-(4-fluorophenyl)-lH-pyrazol-4-yl)-2,6-dimethyl- l,4-dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate (PT- 128):
Figure imgf000084_0001
PT- 128
[0221] To a solution of isopropyl acetoacetate (1.51 ml, 10.4 mmole) in hot ethanol (20 ml) was added 3-(4-fluorophenyl)-4-lH-pyrazolecarboxaldehyde (1.Og, 5.2 mmole) followed by the ammonium acetate (0.77g. 10.0 mmole). The mixture was refluxed for 15h. No precipitate formed. The reaction mixture was reduced in vacuo and dissolved in ethyl acetate. The organic phase was washed with water (2X), decanted and concentrated in vacuo. This material was purified on 150g Siθ2 flash column using 50% ethyl acetate: hexanes as eluent. Rf = 0.29 in 1: 1 ethyl acetate: hexanes. 1H NMR ( 400 MHz; CDCl3) δ 7.72-7.64 (m, 2H); 7.44 (s, IH); 7.14-7.08 (m, 2H); 5.43 (s, IH); 5.16 (s, IH); 4.98-4.86 (m, 2H); 2.18 (s, 6H); 1.12 (d, 6H, J = 6.3 Hz); 1.0 (d, 6H, J = 6.3 Hz). LC MS shows MH + at 442; M+Na at 464 and 2M+H at 883.
EXAMPLE 21:
[0222] Synthesis of (4'-(methoxycarbonyl)biphenyl-4-yl)methyl 5-methyl-7-
(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate (PT-200):
Figure imgf000085_0001
[0223] The procedure in Example 1OA was followed (same scale) except using para- methoxycarbonylphenylboronic acid as the coupling partner to provide the PT-200 product in 21% yield.
EXAMPLE 22:
[0224] Synthesis of 2-(5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidin-6-yl)-5-phenyl-l,3,4-oxadiazole (PT-200)
Figure imgf000085_0002
[0225] Procedure: Compound A (735 mg, 1.7276 mmol) was dissolved in POCl3 (6.0 ml, 65.27 mmol) and heated at 100° C overnight. In 15 h LCMS showed the disappearance of A and formation of B as the major component (81%, tr 5.2 m). The mixture was cooled to room temperature, and the majority of the liquid was removed in vacuo. Ethyl acetate (30 ml) added, and the mixture was then poured into 2M Na2CO3 (30 ml) at 0° C and stirred for 30 min. A grey suspension formed between the aqueous and organic phases. An insoluble solid was recovered by filtration and was washed with H2O (100 ml), cold EtOAc (10 ml), and then dried in vacuo to afford a grey solid B (350 mg, 50%). LCMS mz 408.2 (M+H). 1HNMR (DMSO-D6) matched the desired structure. Analytical HPLC > 97% purity.
[0226] The filtrate was extracted with EtOAc (2 x 50 ml), and the combined organic phase was washed with 30% NH4Cl (2 x 40 ml), brined (60 ml), dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated to give brown gel-like solid (ca. 320 mg, including 90% of B). [0227] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in this Example above, but replacing the starting material with another compound of Formulas (I)-(VI) that has a -C(O)-NH-NH-C(O)- moiety, further compounds of present invention may be prepared. Examples are listed in the following Table:
Table 12:
ID (PT-nnn) Name of Compound
2-(5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-6-yl)-5-phenyl-
PT-203 1,3,4-oxadiazole
2-(5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-6-yl)-5- PT-252 phenethyl- 1,3,4-oxadiazole
2-benzyl-5-(5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-6-yl)- PT-261 1,3,4-oxadiazole
2-methyl-5-(5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-6-yl)- PT-267
1,3,4-oxadiazole
3-(5-benzyl-l,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)-2-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,6,7,8- PT-276 tetrahydroquinolin-5 ( 1 H) -one
EXAMPLE 23:
[0228] Synthesis of diethyl 2,6-dimethyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)pyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate
(PT- 193):
Figure imgf000086_0001
PT- 108 PT- 193
[0229] To a solution of PT-108 ( 0.379 g, 1.0 mmole) in toluene (5.0 ml) at 8O0C was added DDQ (2,3-dichloro-5,6-dicyanoquinone; 0.34Og, 1.5 mmole) all at once. The mixture is heated for Ih and then the toluene is removed in vacuo. The crude reaction was then applied to 25g SiO2 flash column using 30% ethyl acetate: hexanes eluent, Rf = 0.29. This provided the desired product (0.139g, 37%) as a light pinkish oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz; CDCl3) δ 7.9-7.8 (m, 2H); 7.5-7.38 (m, 4H); 7.3-7.25 (m,lH); 3.76-3.64 (m, 4H); 2.66 (s, 6H); 0.45 (t, 6H, J = 7.4 Hz). LC MS shows MH + at 378. [0230] Similarly, by essentially following the procedures set out in this Example above, but replacing the starting material with another compound of Formulas (I)-(VI) that has a dihydopyridine moiety, further compounds of present invention may be prepared. Examples are listed in the following Table:
Table 13 ID
(PT-nnn) Name of Compound PT- 193 diethyl 2,6-dimethyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)pyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate
PT-324 benzyl 2-methyl-5-oxo-4-phenyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinoline-3-carboxylate PT-371 benzyl 6-methyl-4-phenyl-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5-carboxylate ethyl 4-(3'-acetylbiphenyl-2-yl)-6-memyl-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5-
PT-450 carboxylate
PT-472 ethyl 6-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5-carboxylate PT-474 ethyl 6-methyl-4-phenyl-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridine-5-carboxylate
EXAMPLE 24:
[0231] Synthesis of 12-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5,6,7,12-tetrahydrobenzo[f]tetrazolo[5,l- b]quinazoline (PT- 198):
Figure imgf000087_0001
PT-1 98
[0232] To a solution of 5-aminotetrazole (0.850g, 10.0 mmole) and triethylamine (0.250ml, 1.8 mmole) in hot ethanol (25 ml) was added 1-naphthaldehyde (1.36ml, 10.0 mmole) followed by 2-tetralone (1.32ml, 10.0 mmole). The mixture is refluxed for 72h after which time a small amount of powdery precipitate is observed. Upon cooling the reaction to room temperature, it was filtered and washed with ethyl ether to provide the desired product (0.189g, 5.1%) as a tan powder. . 1H NMR (400 MHz; DMSO-d6) δ 10.9 (bs, IH); 9.0 (bs, IH); 8.05-7.85 (m, 2H); 7.77 (at, IH, J = 7.0 Hz); 7.65 (at, 2H, J = 7.0 Hz); 7.42 (at, IH, J = 7.4 Hz); 7.14 (d, IH, J = 7.4 Hz); 7.0-6.75 (m, 3H); 3.0-2.6 (m, 4H). LC MS shows MH + at 352; 2M+H at 703 and 2M+Na at 725. FURTHER EXAMPLES
Table 14: list of further compounds of the invention
ID (PT-nnn) Name of Compound πi _ ethyl 4,5-dimethyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate PT 066 (5-methyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-6-yl)(4- phenylpiperidin- 1 -yl)methanone
PT CfIO S-methyl^-Cnaphthalen-l-y^-N-CC^-l-phenylethy^^J-dihydrotetrazolofl^- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxamide
PT-092 ethyl 6-amino-5-cyano-4-(furan-2-yl)-2-methyl-4H-pyran-3-carboxylate
PT-095 2-amino-4-(4-bromophenyl)-5-oxo-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinoline-3-carbonitrile . ,, 4-(3-(ethoxycarbonyl)-7,7-dimethyl-5-oxo-2-propyl-l,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydroquinolin-4- yl)benzoic acid PT 1 SS 3-ethyl 5-methyl 2-((2-aminoethoxy)methyl)-4-(2-chlorophenyl)-6-methyl-l,4- dihydropyridine-3,5-dicarboxylate
PT 1 86 7-amino-5-(4-bromophenyl)-l,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-lH-pyrano[2,3- d]pyrimidine-6-carbonitrile pT 1 Q. benzyl 4,5-dimethyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-6- carboxylate
PT-198 12-(naphthalen-l-yl)-5,6,7,12-tetrahydrobenzo[f]tetrazolo[5,l-b]quinazoline
3-(2-(6-(ethoxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7- yl)phenoxy)benzoic acid PT 974 3-(3-(6-(ethoxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7- yl)phenoxy)benzoic acid PT 901 4-(2-(6-(ethoxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7- yl)phenoxy)benzoic acid PT 90S 4-(3-(6-(ethoxycarbonyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidin-7- yl)phenoxy)benzoic acid
PT-321 benzyl 2-methyl-4-phenyl- 1 ,4-dihydroquinoline-3-carboxylate
,, » benzyl 5-(2-(dimethylamino)ethyl)-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate benzyl 7-(2-(4-(ethylsulfonyl)piperazin-l-yl)-6-methoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-4,7- dihydrotetrazolo [ 1 ,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT AC\A t»enzyl 7-(4'-(l-hydroxyethyl)biphenyl-2-yl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
PT-465 ethyl 6-acetyl-7-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5-a]pyrimidine-5-carboxylate PT _17Q emyl 7-(2-(3-(ethoxycarbonyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT άRI emyl V-(2-(4-(ethoxycarbonyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate PT Z-QzI emyl 7-(3-(3-(ethoxycarbonyl)phenoxy)phenyl)-5-methyl-4,7-dihydrotetrazolo[l,5- a]pyrimidine-6-carboxylate
PT- 204 ethyl 6-methyl-2-oxo-4-(thiophen-2-yl)-l,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate PT 90S 5-(5-(ethoxycarbonyl)-6-methyl-2-oxo-l,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidiii-4-yl)thiophene-2- carboxylic acid PT 906 emyl 4-(5-bromothiophen-2-yl)-6-methyl-2-oxo-l,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5- carboxylate - . ethyl 4-(5-ethylthiophen-2-yl)-6-methyl-2-oxo-l,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5- carboxylate
PT- 208 ethyl 6-methyl-2-oxo-4-(thiophen-3-yl)-l,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate PT 209 ethyl 2-ox°-6-ProPy1-4-(5-(2-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)furan-2-yl)-l,2,3,4- tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate
PT-210 ethyl 4-(furan-3-yl)-2-oxo-6-propyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate PT-211 ethyl 4-(5-ethylfuran-2-yl)-2-oxo-6-propyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate prp o, o ethyl 4-(5-bromothiophen-2-yl)-2-oxo-6-propyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5- carboxylate pτ o. o S-CS-Cethoxycarbony^^-oxo-ό-propyl-l^^^-tetrahydropyrimidin^-y^thiophene^- carboxylic acid PT 914 ethyl 2-oxo-4-(5-phenylthiophen-2-yl)-6-propyl-l,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5- carboxylate _„ O 1 _ ethyl 4-(5-ethylthiophen-2-yl)-2-oxo-6-propyl- 1,2,3, 4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5- carboxylate pτ ^- , 2-methoxyethyl 6-methyl-2-oxo-4-(4-phenoxyphenyl)-l,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5- carboxylate __, ^1 - ethyl 4-(benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl)-6-ethyl-2-oxo-l,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5- carboxylate
„„ O 1 o ethyl 6-ethyl-4-(3-methylbenzo[b]thiophen-2-yl)-2-oxo-l,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5- r 1 -/ 1 O car ,boxy ,lat ,e
PT-219 ethyl 4-(benzofuran-2-yl)-6-ethyl-2-oxo-l,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate
PT- 220 3-methyl-4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-4,5-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridin-6(7H)-one
PT- 221 4-(naphthalen-l-yl)-l-phenyl-4,5-dihydro-lH-pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyridin-6(7H)-one
PT- 222 3,3'-(naphthalen- 1 -ylmethylene)bis(4-hydroxyfuran-2(5H)-one)
[0233] The example compounds were synthesized using methods disclosed herein or methods which will be readily apparent given the disclosure herein and methods well known in the art. A list of such example compounds is given in Tables accompanying the Examples. In typical embodiments, the present invention includes a compound listed in the Tables accompanying the Examples (e.g. Tables 1-14. For ease of reference herein, each compound in the Tables has an assigned identifier ("PT-nnn"), and the compounds may be referred to herein by the identifier.
TESTING
[0234] Activity testing is conducted in the Examples below using methods described herein and those well known in the art.
Sodium current screening assays:
[0235] The late sodium current (Late INa) and peak sodium current (Peak INa) assays are performed on an automated electrophysiology platform, PatchXpress 7000A (MDS Analytical Technologies, Sunnyvale, CA), which uses the whole cell patch clamp technique to measure currents through the cell membrane of up to 16 cells at a time. The assay uses an HEK293 (human embryonic kidney) cell line heterologously expressing the wild-type human cardiac sodium channel, hNav1.5, purchased from Millipore (Billerica, MA). No beta subunits were coexpressed with the Na channel alpha subunit. Cells are maintained with standard tissue culture procedures and stable channel expression is maintained with 400 μg/ml Geneticin in the culture medium. Cells isolated for use on PatchXpress are incubated for 5 minutes in Versene IX and then for 2 minutes in 0.0125% Trypsin-EDTA (both at 37 0C) to ensure that 80-90% of the cells are single and not part of a cell cluster. Experiments are carried out at 24-27 0C.
[0236] For both the Late INa and Peak INa assays, series resistance compensation is set to 50% and whole-cell compensation is performed automatically. Currents are low- pass filtered at 10 kHz and digitized at 31.25 kHz. Currents through open sodium channels are automatically recorded and stored in the DataXpress2 database (MDS Analytical Technologies, Sunnyvale, CA). Analysis is performed using DataXpress2 analysis software and data are compiled in Excel.
[0237] Compound stocks are routinely made in glass vials to 10 mM in dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO). In some cases, when compounds are not soluble in DMSO, they are made in 100% ethanol. Stocks are sonicated as necessary. The extracellular solution for screening Late INa is composed of: 140 mM NaCl, 4 mM KCl, 1.8 mM CaCl2, 0.75 mM MgCl2, and 5 mM HEPES with pH adjusted to 7.4 using NaOH. The extracellular solution for screening Peak INa is composed of: 20 mM NaCl, 120 mM N-methyl-D glucamine, 4 mM KCl, 1.8 mM CaCl2, 0.75 mM MgCl2, and 5 mM HEPES with pH adjusted to 7.4 using HCl. The intracellular solution used to perfuse the inside of the cells for both the Late INa and Peak INa assays contains: 120 mM CsF, 20 mM CsCl, 5 mM EGTA, 5 mM HEPES and pH adjusted to 7.4 with CsOH. Compounds are diluted in extracellular solution to 10 μM in glass vials and then transferred to glass well plates before robotic addition to the cells. The ONa extracellular solution used at the end of each experiment for the Late INa and Peak INa assays to measure baseline current contains: 140 mM N-methyl-D-glucamine; 4 mM KCl; 1.8 mM CaCl2; 0.75 mM MgCl2; 5 mM HEPES and pH was adjusted to 7.4 with HCl. Late INa Screening Assay:
[0238] For the Late INa assay, sodium channels are activated every 10 seconds (0.1 Hz) by depolarizing the cell membrane to -20 mV for 250 milliseconds (ms) from a holding potential of -120 mV. In response to a -20 mV voltage step, typical Nav1.5 sodium currents activate rapidly to a peak negative current and then inactivate nearly completely within 3-4 ms (see Figure 1).
[0239] All compounds are tested to determine their activity in blocking the late sodium current. Late INa current is generated by adding 10 μM Tefluthrin (pyrethroid) to the extracellular solution while recording Na currents. In Figure 2 the black traces (designated by the arrow, 101) are Na current measured before addition of Tefluthrin and the gray traces (designated by the arrow, 102) are measured after Tefluthrin addition. For some experiments, 50 nM ATX II (sea anemone toxin), another late INa activator, was used to generate the late component. Both activators generate late components that are large enough that block of the late component by compounds can be measured easily. For the purposes of the screening, late INa is defined as the mean current between 225 ms and 250 ms after stepping to -20 mV to activate Na channels. After establishing the whole cell recording configuration, late INa activators are added to each well 4 times over a 16-17 minute period so that the late component of the Na current reaches a stable value. Compounds are then added (typically at 10 μM), in the presence of late INa activator, with 3 additions over the course of 7 or 8 minutes. Measurements are made typically at the end of exposure to the third compound addition. Baseline current in the absence of Na+ ions is measured at the end of each experiment (after two additions of ONa solution-see above) and is used to calculate the percent block by compound.
Peak INa Screening Assay:
[0240] Compounds were also evaluated for their effect in several other assays, including their effect on Peak INa. In some cases, the effect on Peak INa was measured using data from the Late INa assay. However, peak currents were often too large to make this possible, requiring a separate assay to evaluate the effect on peak INa. Since the peak INa can be very large, introducing artifacts in the recording, the concentration of Na+ in the bath is reduced to 20 mM and a nonpermeant cation is added to compensate for the Na+ that was omitted from the standard extracellular solution (see above). The peak INa assay uses a holding potential of -100 mV and a 20 ms test pulse to 0 mV to activate the channel. As in the Late INa assay, stepping the voltage to 0 mV causes a rapid increase in negative Na current through hNavl.5 that inactivates within a few ms. No late INa activator is added for the peak assay. [0241] For the separate peak INa assay, both tonic (TB) block and use-dependent (UDB) block of peak inward sodium current by 10 μM compound are determined. TB is block of the channel in the resting state, before the channel opens. TB is simulated in this assay by stimulating the channel to open at a low frequency (0.1 Hz). This is done in order to measure the control current amplitude and monitor current rundown, enabling correction for rundown in the calculation of percent block for TB. UDB is measured by stimulating the channel to open at a higher frequency (3 Hz) and is used to determine accumulated block in activated states by compound. Activating the channel at this higher frequency typically also decreases the peak current some even in the absence of compound. Therefore, the assay is designed to measure the use-dependent decrease in peak both in the absence and in the presence of compound, and the calculation of UDB corrects the decrease in current measured in the presence of compound for the decrease in current in the absence of compound (Figure 6). [0242] After establishing the whole cell recording configuration, currents are allowed to stabilize for 6-10 minutes while channels are activated briefly at 0.1 Hz. This is followed by a 2 minute stimulation at 3 Hz and then a 2 minute stimulation at 0.1 Hz before addition of compound. Compound is added 3 times over a period of 2 to 3 minutes and channels are exposed to compound for 8 to 9 minutes before another round of high frequency stimulation at 3 Hz for 2 minutes. As with the late INa assay, ONa extracellular solution is added two times at the end to establish the baseline current and demonstrate the quality of solution exchange and the recording.
hERG Screening Assay:
[0243] Compounds were screened to test their activity in blocking the hERG potassium channel. The hERG channel is heterologously expressed in a CHO (Chinese Hamster Ovary) cell line. Cells are maintained with standard tissue culture procedures and stable channel expression is maintained with 500 μg/ml G418 in the culture medium. Cells are harvested for testing on the PatchXpress automated patch clamp with Accumax (Innovative Cell Technologies, San Diego, CA) to isolate single cells. [0244] The following solutions are used for electrophysiological recordings. The external solution contains: 2 mM CaCl2; 2 mM MgCl2; 4 mM KCl; 150 mM NaCl; 10 mM Glucose; 10 mM HEPES (pH 7.4 with IM NaOH, osmolarity). The internal solution contains: 140 mM KCl, 10 mM MgCl2, 6 mM EGTA, 5 mM HEPES, 5 mM ATP (pH adjusted to 7.25 with KOH).
[0245] hERG channels are activated when the voltage is stepped to +20 mV from the - 80 mV holding potential (see Figure 3). During a 5 second step at +20 mV, the channels activate and then largely inactivate, so the currents are relatively small. Upon returning to -50 mV from +20 mV, hERG currents transiently become much larger as inactivation is rapidly removed and then the channel closes. The first step to -50 mV for 300 ms is used as a baseline for measuring the peak amplitude during the step to -50 mV after channel activation. The peak current at -50 mV is measured both under control conditions and after addition of compound.
[0246] All compounds are prepared as 10 mM DMSO stocks in glass vials. Stock solutions are mixed by vigorous vortexing and sonication for about 2 minutes at room temperature. For testing, compounds are diluted in glass vials using an intermediate dilution step in pure DMSO and then further diluted to working concentrations in external solution. Dilutions are prepared no longer than 20 minutes before use. [0247] After achieving the whole-cell configuration, cells are monitored for 90 seconds to assess stability and washed with external solution for 66 seconds. The voltage protocol described above is then applied to the cells every 12 seconds and throughout the whole procedure. Only cells with stable recording parameters and meeting specified health criteria are allowed to enter the compound addition procedure. [0248] External solution containing 0.1% DMSO (vehicle) is applied to the cells first to establish the control peak current amplitude. After allowing the current to stabilize for 3 to 5 minutes, 1 μM and then 10 μM test compounds are applied. Each compound concentration is added 4 times and cells are kept in test solution until the effect of the compound reaches steady state or for a maximum of 12 minutes. After addition of test compound, a positive control (1 μM Cisapride) is added and must block >95% of the current for the experiment to be considered valid. Washout in the external solution compartment is performed until the recovery of the current reaches steady state. Data are analyzed using DataXpress, Clampfit (Molecular Devices, Inc., Sunnyvale) and Origin 7 (Originlab Corp.)
L-tvpe Calcium Channel Activity Well-Plate Assay:
[0249] Cell Culture: IMR-32 (human neuroblastoma) cells were obtained from The American Type Culture Collection. The cells were maintained in MEM supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum, 2 mM of L-glutamine, 100 IU/ml of penicillin, 50 μg/ml of streptomycin, 1 % of sodium pyruvate, 1 % of sodium bicarbonate and 1 % of nonessential amino acid. The cells were cultured at 37°C in a humidified 5% CO2/95% air incubator. Culture medium was changed every two days and cells were recultivated when they reached 70-80% confluent.
[0250] Assay: IMR-32 cells were seeded on a Microtest 96-well Assay Plate (BD FALCON™) at a density of 200,000 cells/well in 200 μl culture medium for overnight. The culture medium was removed, and replaced by 120 μl Ca-4 dye (MDS Analytical Technologies, Sunnyvale, CA) in HBSS (Ix Hank's Balanced Salt solution plus 20 mM HEPES, pH 7.4) containing 2 mM probenecid. Cells were then incubated for 1 hour at 37 ° in incubator. Testing compounds were diluted from 5 μM - 50 μM in HBSS, and 40 μl were added in cells before assay. L-type calcium channel activities (Max - Min) were measured after addition of 40 μl of 1 μM (-)Bay K 8644 plus 50 mM KCl (final concentration) using FlexStation (Molecular Devices) immediately after addition of testing compounds. The inhibition of L-type calcium channel activity by compounds was then calculated. Figure 4 shows results of the assay for four compounds tested and the controls. The four compounds were Test(a) - PT-163; Test(b) - PT-108; Test(c) - PT-181; and Test(d) - PT-113.
[0251] Compounds were tested using the described assay methods. Data are shown in Table 15. Data are shown for results obtained by testing the listed compounds at a concentration of 10 μM in the late INa and Peak INa assays, and at 1 μM and 10 μM for the hERG and L-type calcium channel assays. Table 15: Assay results hERG Patch
CaL Plate Assay Clamp
Tonic UDB
Late Peak Peak
IU
INa INa % INa hERG hERG 1 μM % 10 μM
(PT-nπn) % blk blk % blk % blk % blk blk % blk
PT-001 28.8
PT-002 53.1 2.4 1 1.5 28.0
PT-003 14.5
PT-004 25.5
PT-005 25.4
PT-006 5.4
PT-007 44.0
PT-008 57.2 2.1 10.0 33.5 0 9
PT-009 8.2
PT-010 36.1 12.5 30.0
PT-011 37.7
PT-012 40.1
PT-013 45.4
PT-014 50.9 9.0 0 40
PT-015 27.2
PT-016 30.7
PT-017 45.9 10.0 23.5
PT-Ol 8 36.5 14.5 36.5
PT-019 35.7 10.0 26.0
PT-020 47.7
PT-021 48.2 13.0 43.5
PT-022 26.0
PT-023 32.8
PT-024 72.6
PT-025 78.8 1 1.0 53.0
PT-026 10.3
PT-027 74.9 29.7 6.8 14.0 64.5 0 0
PT-028 23.1
PT-029 52.1
PT-030 66.5 10.5 34.5
PT-031 28.6
PT-032 63.6 11.5 19.0 50.5
PT-033 23.3
PT-034 52.4 14.5 56.0
PT-035 44.0
PT-036 41.0
PT-037 34.4
Figure imgf000096_0001
Figure imgf000097_0001
Figure imgf000098_0001
Figure imgf000099_0001
Figure imgf000100_0001
Figure imgf000101_0001
Figure imgf000102_0001
Figure imgf000103_0001
Figure imgf000104_0001
10.5 14.0
24.0
20.8 16.2
Figure imgf000105_0001
L-type Calcium Channel Patch Clamp Screening Assay:
[0252] Compounds are screened to test for block of human cardiac L-type calcium channels (hCavl.2, encoded by the human CACNAlC gene and coexpressed with the beta 2 subunit, encoded by the human CACNB2 gene) expressed in an HEK293 cell line. Stable transfectants were selected using antibiotic resistance genes incorporated into the expression plasmids and selection pressure is maintained with selection antibiotics added to the culture medium. Cells are cultured using standard tissue culture methods for HEK293 cells.
[0253] Cells are harvested for addition to a PatchXpress automated patch clamp system. The external solution contains: 137 mM NaCl; 4 mM KCl; 1.8 mM CaCl2; 1 mM MgCl2; 10 mM HEPES; 10 mM Glucose (pH adjusted to 7.4 with NaOH). The internal solution contains: 130 mM Cs Aspartate; 5 mM MgCl2; 5 mM EGTA; 4 mM ATP; 0.1 mM GTP; 10 mM HEPES (pH adjusted to 7.2 with N-methyl-D-glucamine). [0254] Onset of block and steady state block of hCavl.2 channels are monitored using a stimulus voltage pattern consisting of a depolarizing test pulse (duration, 200 ms; amplitude, 10 mV) at 10s intervals from a -80 mV holding potential (Figure 5). Test compound concentrations (1 μM and 10 μM) are applied cumulatively in ascending order without washout between applications. Peak current is measured during the step to 10 mV. A saturating concentration of nifedipine (10 μM) is added at the end of each experiment to completely block hCavl.2 current and verify sensitivity to channel blockade. Leakage current is measured after nifedipine addition and digitally subtracted from the total membrane current record. Each compound is applied to naϊve cells and each concentration is applied four times for a total exposure duration of five (5) minutes per concentration.
[0255] Test compound stock solutions are prepared in dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) and stored frozen. Test compound concentrations are prepared fresh daily by diluting stock solutions into the external HEPES -buffered physiological saline solution described above. Previous results have shown that < 0.3% DMSO does not affect channel current, so all test formulations contain 0.3% DMSO. Each test compound formulation is sonicated (Model 2510/5510, Branson Ultrasonics, Danbury, CT), at ambient room temperature for at least 20 minutes to facilitate dissolution. In preparation for the recording session, a glass-lined 96-well compound plate is loaded with the appropriate amounts of test and control solutions, and placed in the plate well of PatchXpress® (Model 7000A, MDS Analytical Technologies, Sunnyvale, CA). [0256] Data acquisition and analyses are performed using conventional software. Steady state is defined by the limiting constant rate of change with time (linear time dependence). The steady state before and after test compound application is used to calculate the percentage of current inhibited at each concentration. Results are shown in Table 16.
Table 16: Results from L-type Calcium Channel Patch Clamp Screening Assay:
ICaL Patch Clamp Assay
1 μM 10 μM
ID (PT-nnn) % blk % blk
PT-437 -0.1 13.2
PT-409 2.7 19.9
PT-431 3.7 2.4
PT-432 3.7 35.3
PT-430 91.8 98.6
[0257] The assay results shown in Table 15 and Table 16 establish that compounds tested showed activity as modulators of late sodium current, for example by inhibiting (or reducing) the late sodium current. In some embodiments, compounds tested potentiated late sodium current (see PT- 163, PT- 165, and PT- 166); such compounds may be useful in stimulating late sodium current in test assays, such as the use of Tefluthrin or sea anemone toxin as described above. [0258] It is generally desirable that the effects of a compound be specific for the late sodium current and show little or no activity with respect to one or more other ion channels. Thus, in some embodiments, a compound having an activity of reducing late sodium current will also exhibit little or no activity with regard to the peak sodium current. In particular embodiments, a compound having an activity of reducing late sodium current will also exhibit little or no activity with regard to the hERG potassium channel. In some embodiments, a compound having an activity of reducing late sodium current will also exhibit little or no activity with regard to the L-type calcium channel. For example, a given compound may provide a 30% (or greater, e.g. more than 40%, more than 50%, more than 60%, more than 70%, more than 80%) reduction in late sodium current in the assay described herein, and the same compound may exhibit little or no activity for one or more of the peak sodium current, the hERG potassium channel, and the L-type calcium channel. In this regard, a compound having "little" effect will typically show less then a 30% reduction (e.g. less than a 20% reduction, less than a 15% reduction, less than a 10% reduction) in the given activity (e.g. Peak INa, hERG, L-type calcium), when measured using the assay described herein. In this regard, "no" effect means that any activity measured will differ from the control by less than the standard error of the measurement. The assays conducted to measure activities in this regard should be performed as described above, with the compound at a concentration of 10 μM (or at the upper limit of solubility, if less).
[0259] In particular embodiments, a compound will exhibit a high selectivity for the late sodium current modulatory activity as compared to the activity in one or more other ion channels. The selectivity of a compound may be determined by determining the percentage reduction in late sodium current due to the compound, as measured by the assay described above. The percentage reduction in one other ion channel activity, such as the hERG potassium channel or L-type calcium channel, due to the compound is determined as described above. The selectivity is determined by taking the ratio of (percentage reduction in late sodium current) to (percentage reduction in one other ion channel activity). The assays conducted to measure activities in this regard should be performed as described above, with the compound at a concentration of 10 μM (or at the upper limit of solubility, if less). In particular embodiments, the selectivity of a compound of the invention will be at least 5: 1, e.g. at least 6:1, at least 7:1, at least 8:1, at least 9:1, at least 10:1, at least 12:1, at least 15:1, at least 20:1, or at least 25:1, when comparing the percentage reduction in late sodium current versus percentage reduction of one of the peak sodium current, the hERG potassium channel current, or the L-type calcium channel.

Claims

CLAIMSWhat is claimed is:
1. A compound of Formula (I),
Figure imgf000109_0001
wherein:
Ql is carbon or nitrogen,
Q2 is oxygen or Rl-N<, where Rl is hydrogen or optionally substituted lower alkyl; the double dotted line indicated by the arrow is a single bond or a double bond;
R2 is hydrogen, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or -NR21R22, where R21 and R22 are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl;
R3 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, cyano, -C(O)-R31, or -C(O)-O-R31, where R31 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl; or R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is attached form a 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or a saturated or unsaturated carbocyclic moiety, all of which are optionally substituted, by halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl;
R4 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl, provided that any substituent of R4 may itself be optionally substituted, by halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl;
R5 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, -O-R51, or -NR52R53, where R51 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, where R52 and R53 are each independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or R52 and R53 taken together with the nitrogen to which they are both directly attached form 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl moiety, which is optionally substituted by halo, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl; R6 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl, -NR61R62, where R61 and R62 are independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl; or R5 and R6 taken together with the carbons to which R5 and R6 are directly attached and the carbon directly attached to both of the carbons to which R5 and R6 are directly attached form a 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or a saturated or unsaturated carbocyclic moiety, all of which are optionally substituted by halo, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl.
2. The compound of claim 1, wherein R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is directly attached form a tetrazole ring.
3. The compound of claim 1, wherein R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is directly attached form a pyrazole ring.
4. The compound of claim 1, wherein R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is directly attached form an imidazole ring.
5. The compound of claim 1, wherein R2 and R3 taken together with Ql and the carbon to which R2 is directly attached form a five or six membered carbocyclic ring.
6. The compound of claim 1, wherein R4 is optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted heteroaryl.
7. The compound of claim 6, wherein R4 is aryl substituted with one or more groups selected from aryl, lower alkyl, alkyl, heteroaryl, halo, heterocyclyl, amino, and carboxyl, wherein said one or more groups are optionally substituted with alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, halo, or carboxyl.
8. The compound of claim 1, wherein R5 is -O-R51, wherein R51 is optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted benzyl, optionally substituted biphenyl, optionally substituted diphenylmethyl, methyl, ethyl, 1- propyl, 2-propyl.
9. The compound of claim 1, wherein R5 is -NR52R53, where R52 and R53 are each independently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted benzyl; or where R52 and R53 taken together with the nitrogen to which they are both directly attached form a 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl moiety, said 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl or heteroaryl moiety optionally substituted by a group selected from halo, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, aryl, and cycloalkyl and combinations thereof, wherein said alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, aryl, or cycloalkyl are optionally substituted.
10. The compound of claim 1, wherein R5 and R6 taken together with the carbons to which R5 and R6 are directly attached and the carbon directly attached to both of the carbons to which R5 and R6 are directly attached form a 5 or 6 membered heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or a saturated or unsaturated carbocyclic moiety, each which are optionally substituted.
11. A compound named in at least one Table selected from Table 1, Table 2, Table 3, Table 4, Table 5, Table 6, Table 7, Table 8, Table 9, Table 10 Table 11, Table 12, Table 13, or Table 14.
12. The compound of claim 11, wherein the compound is named in Table 1 or Table 2.
I ll
13. The compound of claim 11, wherein the compound is named in Table 3, Table 4, or Table 5.
14. The compound of claim 11, wherein the compound is named in Table 6 or Table 7.
15. The compound of claim 11, wherein the compound is named in Table 9.
16. The compound of claim 11, wherein the compound is named in Table 10 or Table 11.
17. The compound of claim 11, wherein the compound is named in Table 12, Table 13, or Table 14.
18. A pharmaceutical formulation comprising a compound according to claim 1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, hydrate, polymorph, prodrug or tautomeric form thereof, and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
19. A method of treating a disease state in a mammal that is alleviable by treatment with an agent capable of reducing late sodium current, comprising administering to a mammal in need thereof a therapeutically effective dose of a compound according to claiml.
20. The method of claim 18, wherein the disease state is a cardiovascular disease selected from one or more of atrial and ventricular arrhythmias, heart failure (including congestive heart failure, diastolic heart failure, systolic heart failure, acute heart failure), Prinzmetal's (variant) angina, stable and unstable angina, exercise induced angina, congestive heart disease, ischemia, recurrent ischemia, reperfusion injury, myocardial infarction, acute coronary syndrome, peripheral arterial disease, and intermittent claudication.
21. The method of claim 18, wherein the disease state is diabetes or diabetic peripheral neuropathy.
22. The method of claim 18, wherein the disease state results in one or more of neuropathic pain, seizures, or paralysis.
PCT/US2008/069173 2007-07-05 2008-07-03 Optionally condensed dihydropyridine, dihydropyrimidine and dihydropyrane derivatives acting as late sodium channel blockers WO2009006580A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US95863207P 2007-07-05 2007-07-05
US60/958,632 2007-07-05

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2009006580A1 true WO2009006580A1 (en) 2009-01-08

Family

ID=39791210

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2008/069173 WO2009006580A1 (en) 2007-07-05 2008-07-03 Optionally condensed dihydropyridine, dihydropyrimidine and dihydropyrane derivatives acting as late sodium channel blockers

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2009006580A1 (en)

Cited By (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2010002483A1 (en) * 2008-07-03 2010-01-07 Cv Therapeutics, Inc. Optionally condensed dihydro pyridine, dihydropyrimidine and dihydro pyrane derivatives acting as late sodium channel blockers
WO2011003604A1 (en) 2009-07-10 2011-01-13 Bayer Schering Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Indazolyl-substituted dihydroisoxa-zolopyridines and methods of use thereof
EP2348855A2 (en) * 2008-09-17 2011-08-03 Burnham Institute for Medical Research Small molecule compounds for stem cell differentiation
CN102432612A (en) * 2011-09-07 2012-05-02 苏州大学 4,7-dihydrotetrazole[1,5-a]pyrimidine derivative and application thereof to preparation of antitumor medicine
JP2013507425A (en) * 2009-10-13 2013-03-04 ピエール、ファーブル、メディカマン Pyrazolopyridine derivatives as anticancer agents
CN103193780A (en) * 2012-04-24 2013-07-10 广州融新生物科技有限公司 Use of 4,7-dihydrotetrazyl[1,5-alpha]pyrimidine compound and its derivatives in preparation of drug for prevention or treatment on cerebral hemorrhage
WO2013178821A1 (en) * 2012-06-01 2013-12-05 Leibniz-Institut für Altersforschung - Fritz-Lipmann-Institut e.V. (FLI) Inhibitors of the notch signalling pathway and secretion for use in medicine
US8957078B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2015-02-17 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8969360B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2015-03-03 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9233926B2 (en) 2008-09-17 2016-01-12 Sanford-Burnham Medical Research Institute Compounds for stem cell differentiation
US9309250B2 (en) 2011-06-22 2016-04-12 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Substituted pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyrazines as ATR kinase inhibitors
US9340546B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2016-05-17 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9663519B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-05-30 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9670215B2 (en) 2014-06-05 2017-06-06 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US10160760B2 (en) 2013-12-06 2018-12-25 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US11179394B2 (en) 2014-06-17 2021-11-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Method for treating cancer using a combination of Chk1 and ATR inhibitors
US11464774B2 (en) 2015-09-30 2022-10-11 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Method for treating cancer using a combination of DNA damaging agents and ATR inhibitors
RU2836465C1 (en) * 2024-05-22 2025-03-17 Федеральное государственное бюджетное учреждение науки Институт органического синтеза им. И.Я. Постовского Уральского отделения Российской академии наук (ИОС УрО РАН) Method of producing 6-benzyloxycarbonyl-5-methyl-7-(het)aryl-4,7-dihydroazolo[1,5-a]pyrimidines, including active against influenza a/h1n1 virus

Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0111455A2 (en) * 1982-12-10 1984-06-20 Ciba-Geigy Ag Unsaturated lactones
EP0111453A1 (en) * 1982-12-10 1984-06-20 Ciba-Geigy Ag Amide derivatives
US4532248A (en) * 1981-07-30 1985-07-30 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft Method of combatting coronary and vascular diseases
US4596873A (en) * 1985-07-29 1986-06-24 American Home Products Corporation 1,4,5,6,7,8-Hexahydro-2-alkyl-4-aryl-5-oxo-1,7-naphthyridine-3-carboxylic acid aromatic esters and pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts thereof useful as antihypertensive agents
US4874760A (en) * 1987-01-09 1989-10-17 Toa Eiyo, Ltd. 4,7-dihydroisothiazolo(5,4-b)pyridine derivatives and cardiovascular treating agents containing said derivatives
US4918074A (en) * 1984-03-12 1990-04-17 Yoshitomi Pharmaceutical Industries, Ltd. Polyazaheterocycle compounds
US5760073A (en) * 1995-08-14 1998-06-02 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft Substituted 4H-pyrans
US20030022890A1 (en) * 1999-12-06 2003-01-30 Atwal Karnail S. Heterocyclic dihydropyrimidine compounds
WO2005025507A2 (en) * 2003-09-10 2005-03-24 Synta Phamaceuticals Corp. Dihydropyridine compounds for treating or preventing metabolic disorders
WO2006122156A2 (en) * 2005-05-09 2006-11-16 Hydra Biosciences, Inc. Compounds for modulating trpv3 function
WO2007051062A2 (en) * 2005-10-28 2007-05-03 Chemocentryx, Inc. Substituted dihydropyridines and methods of use

Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4532248A (en) * 1981-07-30 1985-07-30 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft Method of combatting coronary and vascular diseases
EP0111455A2 (en) * 1982-12-10 1984-06-20 Ciba-Geigy Ag Unsaturated lactones
EP0111453A1 (en) * 1982-12-10 1984-06-20 Ciba-Geigy Ag Amide derivatives
US4918074A (en) * 1984-03-12 1990-04-17 Yoshitomi Pharmaceutical Industries, Ltd. Polyazaheterocycle compounds
US4596873A (en) * 1985-07-29 1986-06-24 American Home Products Corporation 1,4,5,6,7,8-Hexahydro-2-alkyl-4-aryl-5-oxo-1,7-naphthyridine-3-carboxylic acid aromatic esters and pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts thereof useful as antihypertensive agents
US4874760A (en) * 1987-01-09 1989-10-17 Toa Eiyo, Ltd. 4,7-dihydroisothiazolo(5,4-b)pyridine derivatives and cardiovascular treating agents containing said derivatives
US5760073A (en) * 1995-08-14 1998-06-02 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft Substituted 4H-pyrans
US20030022890A1 (en) * 1999-12-06 2003-01-30 Atwal Karnail S. Heterocyclic dihydropyrimidine compounds
WO2005025507A2 (en) * 2003-09-10 2005-03-24 Synta Phamaceuticals Corp. Dihydropyridine compounds for treating or preventing metabolic disorders
WO2006122156A2 (en) * 2005-05-09 2006-11-16 Hydra Biosciences, Inc. Compounds for modulating trpv3 function
WO2007051062A2 (en) * 2005-10-28 2007-05-03 Chemocentryx, Inc. Substituted dihydropyridines and methods of use

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
DRIZIN I ET AL: "Structure-Activity Studies for a Novel Series of Tricyclic Dihydropyrimidines as K-ATP Channel Operators (KCOS)", BIOORGANIC & MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY LETTERS, PERGAMON, ELSEVIER SCIENCE, GB, vol. 12, 1 January 2002 (2002-01-01), pages 1481 - 1484, XP002362324, ISSN: 0960-894X *

Cited By (37)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8716319B2 (en) 2007-07-05 2014-05-06 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Substituted heterocyclic compounds
US9045428B2 (en) 2007-07-05 2015-06-02 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Substituted heterocyclic compounds
WO2010002483A1 (en) * 2008-07-03 2010-01-07 Cv Therapeutics, Inc. Optionally condensed dihydro pyridine, dihydropyrimidine and dihydro pyrane derivatives acting as late sodium channel blockers
EP2348855A4 (en) * 2008-09-17 2013-01-09 Burnham Inst Medical Research SMALL MOLECULE COMPOUNDS FOR THE DIFFERENTIATION OF STEM CELLS
US9233926B2 (en) 2008-09-17 2016-01-12 Sanford-Burnham Medical Research Institute Compounds for stem cell differentiation
EP2348855A2 (en) * 2008-09-17 2011-08-03 Burnham Institute for Medical Research Small molecule compounds for stem cell differentiation
US9012217B2 (en) 2008-09-17 2015-04-21 Burnham Institute For Medical Research Benzimidazole compounds differentiate a mammalian stem cell into mesodermal or cardiomyocyte cells
WO2011003604A1 (en) 2009-07-10 2011-01-13 Bayer Schering Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Indazolyl-substituted dihydroisoxa-zolopyridines and methods of use thereof
US9073939B2 (en) 2009-07-10 2015-07-07 Bayer Intellectual Property Gmbh Indazolyl-substituted dihydroisoxa-zolopyridines and methods of use thereof
JP2013507425A (en) * 2009-10-13 2013-03-04 ピエール、ファーブル、メディカマン Pyrazolopyridine derivatives as anticancer agents
US9309250B2 (en) 2011-06-22 2016-04-12 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Substituted pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyrazines as ATR kinase inhibitors
CN102432612A (en) * 2011-09-07 2012-05-02 苏州大学 4,7-dihydrotetrazole[1,5-a]pyrimidine derivative and application thereof to preparation of antitumor medicine
CN102432612B (en) * 2011-09-07 2014-09-17 苏州大学 4,7-dihydrotetrazole[1,5-a]pyrimidine derivative and application thereof to preparation of antitumor medicine
CN103193780B (en) * 2012-04-24 2015-07-08 广州融新生物科技有限公司 Use of 4,7-dihydrotetrazyl[1,5-alpha]pyrimidine compound and its derivatives in preparation of drug for prevention or treatment on cerebral hemorrhage
CN103193780A (en) * 2012-04-24 2013-07-10 广州融新生物科技有限公司 Use of 4,7-dihydrotetrazyl[1,5-alpha]pyrimidine compound and its derivatives in preparation of drug for prevention or treatment on cerebral hemorrhage
WO2013178821A1 (en) * 2012-06-01 2013-12-05 Leibniz-Institut für Altersforschung - Fritz-Lipmann-Institut e.V. (FLI) Inhibitors of the notch signalling pathway and secretion for use in medicine
US9828344B2 (en) 2012-06-01 2017-11-28 LEIBNIZ-INSTITUT FÜR ALTERSFORSCHUNG FRITZ-LIPMANN-INSTITUT e.V. (FLI) Inhibitors of the notch signaling pathway and secretion for use in medicine
US9340546B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2016-05-17 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US10392391B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2019-08-27 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9650381B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2017-05-16 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US12187731B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2025-01-07 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US11370798B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2022-06-28 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9718827B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2017-08-01 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US11117900B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2021-09-14 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US10787452B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2020-09-29 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8969360B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2015-03-03 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US8957078B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2015-02-17 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9663519B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-05-30 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US10160760B2 (en) 2013-12-06 2018-12-25 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US10815239B2 (en) 2013-12-06 2020-10-27 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US11485739B2 (en) 2013-12-06 2022-11-01 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US10093676B2 (en) 2014-06-05 2018-10-09 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US10800781B2 (en) 2014-06-05 2020-10-13 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US9670215B2 (en) 2014-06-05 2017-06-06 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Compounds useful as inhibitors of ATR kinase
US11179394B2 (en) 2014-06-17 2021-11-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Method for treating cancer using a combination of Chk1 and ATR inhibitors
US11464774B2 (en) 2015-09-30 2022-10-11 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Method for treating cancer using a combination of DNA damaging agents and ATR inhibitors
RU2836465C1 (en) * 2024-05-22 2025-03-17 Федеральное государственное бюджетное учреждение науки Институт органического синтеза им. И.Я. Постовского Уральского отделения Российской академии наук (ИОС УрО РАН) Method of producing 6-benzyloxycarbonyl-5-methyl-7-(het)aryl-4,7-dihydroazolo[1,5-a]pyrimidines, including active against influenza a/h1n1 virus

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9045428B2 (en) Substituted heterocyclic compounds
WO2009006580A1 (en) Optionally condensed dihydropyridine, dihydropyrimidine and dihydropyrane derivatives acting as late sodium channel blockers
AU2019283921B2 (en) Indole carboxamide compounds useful as kinase inhibitors
JP2923742B2 (en) 4-Aminoquinazoline derivative, method for producing the same, and pharmaceutical containing the same
EP2789615B1 (en) Azaindazoles as Btk kinase modulators and use thereof
CN101228161B (en) Pyrrolopyridines useful as inhibitors of protein kinase
FI95377C (en) Process for the preparation of therapeutically active pyrimidine derivatives
SK67699A3 (en) Novel substituted pyrazole derivatives for the treatment of cardiocirculatory diseases
SK5912003A3 (en) Novel pyridine-substituted pyrazolopyridine derivatives
CZ20021220A3 (en) Aminotriazolopyridine derivatives
US20090181986A1 (en) Substituted heterocyclic compounds
WO2011056985A2 (en) Substituted heterocyclic compounds
EP3632903B1 (en) Compound used as autophagy regulator, and preparation method therefor and uses thereof
JPH06145170A (en) Heterocyclic compound, its preparation and medicinal composition for treatment of hypertension and congestive heart failure
BG99879A (en) Inhibitors of hiv reversive transcriptase
US20240327403A1 (en) PYRIDO[2,3-d]PYRIMIDIN-7-ONES AND RELATED COMPOUNDS AS INHIBITORS OF PROTEIN KINASES
JP2660016B2 (en) Therapeutic drug
EP3240783B1 (en) New benzimidazole derivatives as antihistamine agents
CN105008347A (en) Isoquinolines as potassium ion channel inhibitors
SK12222003A3 (en) Beta-carboline derivatives and its pharmaceutical use against depression and anxiety
KR20120101551A (en) Bicyclic thiazoles as allosteric modulators of mglur5 receptors
JPH03181473A (en) Heterocyclic compounds, methods for their production, pharmaceuticals containing the same for the treatment of cardiovascular disorders, and intermediates for their production
EP2825166A1 (en) Method of treating ophthalmic conditions with kinase inhibitors
PL183686B1 (en) Derivatives of tetracyclic substituted azepines exhibiting affinity in respect to 5-ht2 receptors
JP7034284B2 (en) Substituted aza ring as a muscarinic M1 receptor positive allosteric modulator

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 08781349

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

DPE2 Request for preliminary examination filed before expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed from 20040101)
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 08781349

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

点击 这是indexloc提供的php浏览器服务，不要输入任何密码和下载